A2K5D8 - CNRL Pipeline Specifications 2009

CANADIAN NATURAL RESOURCES
PIPELINE SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL

Revision Date: March 2009
Revision Number: 3.0
PIPELINE SPECIFICATIONS
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
0.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 2 of 241
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
Introduction and Line Classes Pipelines ....................................... 3
2.
Introduction and Line Classes Wellsites ..................................... 54
3.
Pipeline Welding .......................................................................... 55
4.
Wellsite Welding .......................................................................... 60
5.
Flare System Design ..................................................................... 61
6.
Pipeline Stress Relief ................................................................... 71
7.
Wellsite Stress Relief ................................................................... 74
8.
Sour Service Piping ...................................................................... 75
9.
Sour Service Wellsite Facilities .................................................... 82
10.
Hydrogen Degassing ..................................................................... 83
11.
Hot Tapping Pipelines .................................................................. 85
12.
Hot Tapping Tanks ...................................................................... 89
13.
Non Metallic Materials ................................................................. 95
14.
Pipe Line Repairs....................................................................... 107
15.
Pressure Tests ............................................................................ 111
16.
Tie-in Welds Hydrotest Waiver ................................................ 115
17.
Over Pressure Protection ........................................................... 120
18.
Crossings ................................................................................... 122
19.
Pipeline Weights and Rock Guards ............................................. 125
20.
Pipeline Bending ........................................................................ 128
21.
Coatings .................................................................................... 130
22.
Cathodic Protection ................................................................... 131
23.
Corrosion Monitoring Requirements........................................... 133
24.
Pigging Facilities ....................................................................... 135
25.
Discontinuation and Abandonment ............................................. 137
26.
Pipeline Reactivations ................................................................ 139
27.
Re-licensing Pipelines: Sweet to Sour ......................................... 142
28.
Third Party Tie-Ins .................................................................... 145
29.
Ditching and Backfilling............................................................. 147
30.
Typical Drawings ....................................................................... 149
31.
Quality Control: Pipelines .......................................................... 151
32.
Quality Control: Wellsites (ASME B31.3) ................................... 167
33.
Measurement Guidelines ............................................................ 168
34.
Pipeline Specification Waiver ..................................................... 170
35.
Abbreviations List ..................................................................... 178
36.
Valve Descriptions (to be used to clarify line class symbols used in
sections 1&2 of this manual) ................................................................ 179
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 3 of 241
Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines
1 . Introduction and Line Classes Pipelines

Table of Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SCOPE .......................................................................................... 3
LEGISLATION, REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS ....... 3
BASIS OF DESIGN ........................................................................ 4
LINE SIZING ................................................................................ 6
MATERIAL SELECTION ............................................................... 6
COMMISSIONING......................................................................... 6
PIPELINE SERVICE CLASSES...................................................... 7
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS ........................................................... 40
SCOPE
1.1
1.1.1
This specification describes the pipeline classes and material requirements that shall be
met in the supply of pipeline materials and equipment for various services in the
construction and maintenance of oil, gas and water pipelines.
1.1.2
All work shall comply with the legislative and regulatory requirements of the province or
territory of installation as well as the Government of Canada.
1.1.3
In the event of a conflict between this specification and any other governing legislation,
regulation, code or standard the Company must be consulted and the specification
clarified or amended before any work is done.
1.1.4
The pressure and temperature limitations of piping specifications for Canadian Natural
Resources Limited (CNRL or the Company) shall correspond to the pressure and
temperature limitations of the associated flange series, as published in the latest edition of
CSA Z245.11 Steel Fittings, CSA Z245.12 Steel Flanges and CSA Z662 Oil and Gas
Pipeline Systems. Flanges joining pipelines to Process Piping under the jurisdiction of
the Alberta Safety Codes Act (or other equivalent Act in other Provinces) shall be rated at
the pressure/temperature ratings of ASME B16.5.
LEGISLATION, REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
1.2
1.2.1
All piping systems and elements of such systems and the assembly, installation and
testing of such elements and systems shall, where applicable, be equal to or exceed the
minimum requirements as specified in the latest revision of the following codes and
regulations:
a)
The legislation and regulations of the province of territory of installation and the
Government of Canada which govern the design, fabrication and testing of
pipeline systems.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 4 of 241
b)
The legislation and regulations of the province of territory of installation and the
Government of Canada which govern the design, fabrication and testing of
pressure piping systems.
c)
The relevant Provincial Pipeline Act and Regulations and Directives, as

applicable.
d)
National Energy Board (for Yukon, NWT, Nunavut & pipelines crossing
Provincial, Territorial or International Boundaries)
e)
CSA Z662-07 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems
f)
CSA Z245.1 Steel Pipe
g)
CSA Z245.11 Steel Fittings
h)
CSA Z245.12 Steel Flanges
i)
CSA Z245.15 Steel Valves
j)
CNRL Facilities Specifications as applicable
k)
ASME B31.3 Process Piping
l)
ASME Standard B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
m)
API standards and recommended practises as applicable
n)
ASTM Standards as applicable
o)
NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 latest edition, Petroleum and Natural Gas

IndustriesMaterials for use in H2S Containing Environments in Oil and Gas
Production
1.2.2
See Appendix I for Figures showing the breaks between Pipeline Act and Safety Codes
Act jurisdictions. Wellsite piping under the jurisdiction of the Oil & Gas Act and the
Pipeline Act shall be built to CSA Z662. Design engineer may designate other code
design if applicable to service. The drawings apply to Alberta but shall be used as a
guideline for other jurisdictions.
1.2.3
Where two or more codes, standards or regulations apply, the more stringent shall be
used in the design, fabrication and testing of pressure piping systems unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Company.
1.2.4
All piping elements such as pipe, flanges, fittings and other pressure containing
components and accessories shall be properly marked and registered in accordance with
the provisions of the applicable Provincial, Territorial and Federal Acts and regulations.
BASIS OF DESIGN
1.3
1.3.1
General
1.3.1.1
The design of pipeline systems shall provide for the most severe coincident
conditions of temperature, pressure and loading to co-exist under usual long term
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 5 of 241

operating conditions. These usual conditions include all manipulation and
control functions, such as throttling, blocking in and bypassing, etc., likely to be
used for operational control.
1.3.1.2
Usual operational conditions do not include more severe temporary conditions,

such as those incidental to start-up, shutdown or steam-out. Temporary
conditions govern as design conditions only when there is clear evidence that
they exceed time and severity limits in CSA Z662 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems.
1.3.1.3
Design drawings shall clearly identify the break points between codes,
specifications and standards.
1.3.1.4
All pipelines shall be designed to allow for internal inspection tools and for
pigging with multidisk pigs.
1.3.1.5
The design of steam distribution pipelines shall meet the requirements of CSA
Z662 and be reviewed by the Alberta Boilers Safety Association (ABSA) prior to
the ERCB issuing of a license.
1.3.2
Emergency Shutdown Devices
1.3.2.1
1.3.3
Design Pressure
1.3.3.1
1.3.4
If an emergency shutdown device or any part of it fails on a pipeline in sour

service (a minimum of 10 moles H2S per kilometre or as specified), the
emergency shutdown devices shall fail in the closed (safe) position and remain
closed.
The design pressure of pipeline systems shall be greater than the maximum
expected operating pressure.
Design Temperature
1.3.4.1
In special cases of high pressure steam distribution systems then the design shall
be to saturation temperature at pressure, unless the process design is for dry
steam. In that case, a specific design shall be done and the line classes not used.
1.3.4.2
For pipeline systems containing fluids with boiling points below ambient
temperature at atmospheric pressure the effects of auto-refrigeration shall be
assessed and the proposed design minimum temperature approved by the
Company.
1.3.5
Other Loading and Dynamic Effects
1.3.5.1
The stress requirements in this Specification are specifically limited to design

conditions for operating pressure. Additional loadings other than the specified
loads are not addressed in this Specification; however, the designer shall
determine whether supplemental design criteria are necessary for such loadings
and whether additional strength or protection against damage modes or both
should be provided. Refer to Paragraph 4.2.4 in Z662-07 Oil and Gas Pipeline
Systems for additional loading examples.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 6 of 241
1.3.6
Design of the pipeline system, including Wellsite piping shall be as required by CSA
Z662 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems.
1.3.7
For all other pipelines, the stress level must not exceed 72% unless otherwise approved
by both the Provincial Jurisdiction and the Company. The Company must then submit a
non-routine application for the pipeline system.
LINE SIZING
1.4
1.4.1
Piping shall be sized for normal operating conditions in accordance with good
engineering practice and economical service. Line size determination (including
provisions for future increases in capacity) shall be made by CNRL Production and
Facilities Engineering.
1.4.2
The design of pipelines for steam service require special design considerations and prior
written approval from the Company.
MATERIAL SELECTION
1.5
1.5.1
The selection of material grade, thickness and any additional tests etc. shall be
determined by the design factors and service conditions. These factors and the additional
requirements are described in this specification.
1.5.2
All line pipe material shall meet requirements of CSA Z245.1, according to the grade
selected for the application. Line pipe material shall be ordered as CSA Z245.1
Grade 359 CAT II sour, unless otherwise determined by the pipeline coordinator
responsible.
1.5.3
The dimensional requirements of CSA Z245.1 shall apply, except that for nominal pipe
diameters of 406.4mm and over, the following additional requirements shall apply:
The nominal outside diameter shall be within the tolerance specified in

CSA Z245.1 and in no case shall tolerance exceed 0.8mm or +3.2mm at
any location along the length of the pipe.
The minus (-) wall thickness tolerance shall be within 5% of the

specified wall thickness.
The ovality of the pipe at any point shall not exceed 2% of the outside
diameter or 12.7 mm (whichever is less).
Root face dimensions shall, for a minimum average length and maximum
length shall be 7.6m, 21.5m, and 25.0m, respectively.
The weld preparation tolerance shall be as per CSA Z245.1 Clause

10.8.1.2 except that the root face shall be within 1.6mm - 0.4mm.
COMMISSIONING
1.6
1.6.1
All newly constructed metallic pipelines are to receive an initial batch run of corrosion
inhibitor before the pipeline products are introduced unless this requirement is waived by
the Integrity Coordinator or Integrity Tech.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 7 of 241
PIPELINE SERVICE CLASSES
1.7
Class
AZ
Rating
PN 20
(150)
Service
Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons,
Produced Water, Oil Emulsion.
Temp. Range
(F / C)
-40 to 248
-40 to120
BZ
PN 50
(300)

-40 to 248
-40 to 120
CZ
PN100
(600)

-40 to 248
-40 to 120
DZ
PN150
(900)

-20 to 248
-29 to 120
EZ
PN250
(1500)

-20 to 248
-29 to 120
THERMAL ISSUED PIPELINE SERVICE

CLASSES
BTZ-1
PN 50
(300)
Above Ground:
Sweet Oil Emulsion
-20 to 400
-29 to 204
BTSZ-1
PN 50
(300)
Above Ground:
Sour Produced Gas
-20 to 400
-29 to 204
BTZ
PN 50
(300)
Below Ground:
Steam Boiler Feedwater, Boiler Condensate
CTLZ-1
PN 100
(600)
Above Ground:
Sweet Low Temperature Fuel Gas
ETZ-1
PN250
(1500)
Above Ground:
Steam Distribution
669
354
ETVZ-1
PN250
(1500)
Above Ground:
Steam Distribution Pipeline Valve Assemblies
669
354
See Appendix III for Piping Letter / Number Key
Project
Specific
-50 to 400
-45 to 204
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 8 of 241
Line Class AZ
SERVICE:
(Note 16)
Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons, Produced Water, Oil Emulsion
Design Code:
CSA Z662
Corrosion Allowance:
nil
Pressure Limit @ Temperature: (Note 17)
For NPS to 12
(Note 12)
Temp. F
C
MAWP, psig
kPag
-40 to 134
-40 to 57
275
1900
Inspection: (Note 16)
Maximum Hardness:
LINE PIPE
TRANSITION
PIECE
SURFACE
PIPING &
RISERS
NOTES
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
WT (mm)
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
60.3 114.3
168.3
219.1
273.1
323.9
3.2
4.0
4.8
4.8
4.8
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat II Sour

60.3 323.9
Sched 40
BW
Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat I Sour/ ASTM A106-B
21.3 48.3
60.3 323.9
Sched 80
Sched 40
2, 10
13
14, 15
4
FITTINGS
Sockolet
Thredolet
45/90
LR
ELL,
Tee,
Reducers
248
120
245
1690
100% Visual inspection, 100% RT of circumference on 100% of

butt welds on a progressive production basis. 10% MPI or LPI on
socket welds not radiographed.
None for line pipe.
None for above ground piping if hardness controlled welding
procedure used.
HV248, HRC22
Heat Treatment:
ITEM
200
93
259
1790
Material requirements: (Note 1)
SE/BW/SW ASTM A106-B

BW
ASTM A106-B
5
4
12.7 48.3
12.7 48.3
Class 3000
Class 3000
Weld
Weld
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
15
60.3-323.9
Sch 40
BW
ASTM A234 WPB
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
FLANGES
Socket weld
Blind
Weld neck
Pair WN
Orifice
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 9 of 241
RFSW
RF
RF
RF
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
Class 150
5
5
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
GASKETS
5
Class 150
3.2 mm, 316 SS, spiral wound
BOLTING
Stud Bolts
Hex Nuts
ASTM A193, Gr. B7M studs

ASTM A194, Gr. 2HM nuts
VALVES
All valves to meet NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 requirements for use in sour service
ITEM
NOTES
NPS
SCH/RAT
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
Ball
7
- 1
Class 800
SE
ASTM A105 Body floating ball
Ball
7
- 1
Class 800
SW
Ball
6
2 10
Class 150
RF
ASTM A216WCB Body floating ball
Ball
12
Class 150
RF
ASTM A216WCB trunnion gear op.
Gate
Gate
Gate
7
6
- 1
- 1
2 12
Class 800
Class 800
Class 150
SW
T/SW
RF

Globe
Globe
Globe
- 1
24
6 12
Class 800
Class 150
SW
RF
ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A216WCB Body
Use gate valves
Lift Check
Swing Check
8
9
- 1
3 12
Class 800
Class 900
SW
RF
ASTM A105 Body, piston

ASTM A216WCB Body
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 10 of 241
Line Class BZ
SERVICE:
(Note 16)
Design Code:
CSA Z662
nil
(Note 12)
For NPS to 12
Temp. F
C
MAWP, psig
kPag
-40 to 134
-40 to 57
721
4960
Heat Treatment:
Maximum Hardness:
ITEM
LINE PIPE
TRANSITION
PIECE
SURFACE
PIPING &
RISERS
NOTES
248
120
665
4600

socket welds not radiographed. 5% RT of socket welds for fit up
only.
None for line pipe.
procedure used.
HV248, HRC22
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
WT (mm)
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
60.3 114.3
114.3 168.3
219.1
273.1 323.9
3.2
4.0
4.0
4.8
BW
BW
BW
BW

60.3 323.9
Sched 40
BW
Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat I Sour/A106-B
21.3-48.3
60.3 323.9
Sched 80
Sched 40
12.7 48.3
12.7 48.3
Class 3000
Class 3000
Weld
Weld
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
15
60.3-323.9
Sch 40
BW
ASTM A234 WPB
2, 10
13
14, 15
4
FITTINGS
Sockolet
Thredolet
45/90 LR ELL,
Tee, Reducers
200
93
680
4700
SE/SW/BW ASTM A106-B

BW
ASTM A106-B
5, 16
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
ITEM
Page 11 of 241
NOTES
FLANGES
Socket weld
Socket weld,
Blind, Weld
neck, Pair WN
orifice
Page
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
WT (mm)
12.7-114.3
Class 300
141.3-323.9
Class 300
ENDS
RFSW
RF
DESCRIPTION
ASTM A105
ASTM A105-LF2 Cl 1, MSS SP-97
GASKETS
Class 300
BOLTING
Stud Bolts
Hex Nuts

VALVES
ITEM
NOTES NPS
SCH/RAT
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
Ball
7
- 1
Class 800 SE
ASTM A105 Body
Ball
7
- 1
Class 800 SW
ASTM A105 Body
Ball
24
Class 300 RF
ASTM A216 WCB
Ball
6-12
Class 300 RF
ASTM A216 WCB body, gear op. 8 and up
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
7
6
Globe
Globe
Globe
Lift Check
Swing Check
Swing Check
8
9
- 1
- 1
2-4
6-12
Class 800
Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
SW
SE
RF
BW
ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A105 Body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
ITCS body, w/ 13 Cr trim, HF, ST, FP
- 1
2-4
6 12
Class 800 SW
Class 300 BW
ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A216 WCB
Use gate valves
- 1
2-4
6 12
Class 800 SW
Class 300 RF
Class 300 BW
ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A216 WCB
ASTM A216 WCB body, gear op. 6 and up
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 12 of 241
Line Class CZ
SERVICE:
(Note 16)
Design Code:
CSA Z662
nil
(Note 12)
For NPS to 12
Temp. F
C
MAWP, psig
kPag
-40 to 134
-40 to 57
1440
9930
Heat Treatment:
Maximum Hardness:
ITEM
LINE PIPE
TRANSITION
PIECE
SURFACE PIPING
& RISERS
NOTES
200
93
1360
9410
248
120
1330
9200

socket welds not radiographed. 5% RT of socket welds for fit up
only.
None for line pipe.
procedure used.
HV248, HRC22
NPS
(mm)
Wall thickness
sch/rating
WT(mm)
ENDS
Up to 60.3
73 88.9
101.6
114.3
168.3
219.1
273.1
323.9
3.2
3.2
3.2
4.0
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW

60.3-168.3
219.1-273.1
323.9
Sch 40
X STG
Sch 80
BW
BW
BW
ASTM A106-B/Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat I Sour

21.3 -48.3
60.3-168.3
219.1-273.1
Sch 80
Sch 40
X STG
DESCRIPTION
2, 10
13
14, 15
BW
BW
ASTM A106-B
ASTM A106-B
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
ITEM
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 13 of 241
NOTES
NPS
(mm)
ENDS
323.9
Wall thickness
sch/rating
WT(mm)
Sch 80
BW
ASTM A106-B
21.3 48.3
21.3
Class 3000
Class 3000
15
60.3-168.3
Sch 40
Weld
Weld
BW
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A234 WPB
219.1-273.1
323.9
X-STG
Sch 80
BW
BW
ASTM A234 WPB

ASTM A234 WPB
21.3-48.3
48.3-88.9
114.3-323.9
48.3-88.9
114.3-323.9
48.3-88.9
114.3-323.9
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
RF
RF
RF
RF
RF
RF
RF
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
DESCRIPTION
5, 16
FITTINGS
Sockolet
Thredolet
45/90 LR ELL, Tee,
Reducers
FLANGES
Socket weld
Blind
Weld neck
Pair WN Orifice
GASKETS
Class 600
BOLTING
Stud Bolts
Hex Nuts

VALVES
ITEM
NOTES
NPS
SCH/RAT
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
Ball
- 1
Class 800
SE
ASTM A105 Body
Ball
- 1
Class 800
SW
ASTM A105 Body
Ball
23
Class 600
RF
ASTM A216 WCB Body
Ball
4-12
Class 600
RF
ASTM A216 WCB Body, gear op.
Gate
- 1
Class 800
SW
ASTM A105 body
Gate
- 1
Class 800
SE
ASTM A105 body
Gate
2-3
Class 600
RF
ASTM A216 WCB body
Gate
Globe
4 12
- 1
Class 600
Class 800
RF
SW
ASTM A216 WCB body

ASTM A105 body
23
Class 600
RF
ASTM A105 body
Globe
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
ITEM
NOTES
Globe
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
NPS
SCH/RAT
ENDS
4 12
DESCRIPTION
Use gate valves
Lift Check
- 1
Class 800
SW
ASTM A105 body
Swing Check
23
Class 600
RF
ASTM A216 WCB
4 12
Class 600
RF
ASTM A216 WCB body
Swing Check
Page 14 of 241
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 15 of 241
Line Class DZ
SERVICE:
(Note 16)
Design Code:
Z662
nil
For NPS to12
Temp. F
C
MAWP, psig
kPag
-20 to 100
-29 to 38
2160
14890
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
Maximum Hardness:
ITEM
LINE PIPE
TRANSITION
PIECE
SURFACE
PIPING &
RISERS
NOTES
248
120
2000
13800

butt welds, 100% MPI or LPI on socket welds not radiographed.
None for line pipe.
procedure used.
HV248, HRC22
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
60.3-88.9
114.3
168.3
219.1
273.1
323.9
3.2
4.0
5.2
6.4
8.7
9.5
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW

60.3-88.9
114.3-168.3
219.1-323.9
Sch 40
Sch 80
XX-STG
BW
BW
BW

21.3 -48.3
60.3-88.9
Sch 80
Sch 40
114.3-168.3
Sch 80
BW
219.1-323.9
XX-STG
BW
ASTM A106-B
21.3-48.3
Class 3000
Weld
ASTM A105
2, 10
13
14, 15
4
FITTINGS
Sockolet
200
93
2045
14120
BW
ASTM A106-B
ASTM A106-B
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page 16 of 241
ITEM
NOTES
Thredolet
45/90 LR ELL, Tee
4
15
15
15
NPS
SCH/RATING
(mm)
21.3-48.3
Class 3000
60.3-88.9
Sch 40
114.3-168.3
Sch 80
219.1-323.9
XX STG
5
5
21.3-48.3
48.3-323.9
48.3-323.9
48.3-323.9
FLANGES
Socket weld
Blind
Weld neck
Pair WN Orifice
Page
ENDS
Weld
BW
BW
BW
Class 900
Class 900
Class 900
Class 900
RF
RF
RF
RF
DESCRIPTION
ASTM A105
ASTM A234 WPB
ASTM A234 WPB
ASTM A234 WPB
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
GASKETS
Class 900
BOLTING
Stud Bolts
Hex Nuts

VALVES
ITEM
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
Globe
Globe
Globe
Globe
Lift Check
Swing Check
Swing Check
NOTES
7
6
6
NPS
- 1
- 1
23
4 -12
SCH/RAT
Class 1500
Class 800
Class 900
Class 900
ENDS
SW
SE
RF
RF
7
6
6
- 1
- 1
2-3
4 12
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 900
Class 900
SW
SE
RF
RF
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A105 body
ASTM A216 WCB body
ASTM A216 WCB body
- 1
- 1
23
4 12
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 900
SW
SE
RF
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A105 body
ASTM A216 WCB body
Use gate valves
- 1
23
4 12
Class 1500
Class 900
Class 900
SW
RF
RF
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A216 WCB body
ASTM A216 WCB body
7
6
6
6
DESCRIPTION
ASTM A105 Body
ASTM A105 Body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
ASTM A216 WCB body, gear op.
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 17 of 241
Line Class EZ
SERVICE:
(Note 16)
Design Code:
Z662
nil
For NPS to12
Temp. F
C
MAWP, psig
kPag
-20 to 100
-29 to 38
3600
24820
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
Maximum Hardness:
ITEM
LINE PIPE
TRANSITION
PIECE
SURFACE
PIPING &
RISERS
NOTES
248
120
3335
23000

butt welds, 100% MPI or LPI on socket welds not radiographed.
None for line pipe.
procedure used.
HV248, HRC22
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
ENDS
DESCRIPTION
60.3
88.9
114.3
168.3
219.1
273.1
323.9
4.0
4.8
5.6
8.7
11.1
Calculate
Calculate
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW
BW

60.3-88.9
114.3-323.9
Sch 160
Sch 160
BW
BW
ASTM A106-B
ASTM A106-B
21.3 -48.3
60.3-323.9
Sch 160
Sch 160
21.3-48.3
21.3-48.3
60.3-323.9
Class 6000
Class 6000
Sch 160
2, 10
13
14, 15
4
FITTINGS
Sockolet
Thredolet
45/90 LR ELL, Tee
200
93
3410
23540
4
15

BW
ASTM A106-B
Weld
Weld
BW
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A234 WPB
Rev.
Section Number
1.0
ITEM
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Page 18 of 241
NOTES
FLANGES
Socket weld
Blind
Weld neck
Pair WN Orifice
Page
5
5
NPS
(mm)
SCH/RATING
ENDS
21.3-48.3
48.3-323.9
48.3-323.9
48.3-323.9
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
RTJ
RTJ
RTJ
RTJ
DESCRIPTION
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
ASTM A105
GASKETS
Class 1500
Oval Ring 316 SS
BOLTING
Stud Bolts
Hex Nuts

VALVES
ITEM
Ball
Ball
Ball
Ball
Gate
Gate
Gate
Gate
Globe
Globe
Globe
Globe
Lift Check
Swing Check
Swing Check
NOTES
7
6
6
NPS
- 1
- 1
23
4 -12
SCH/RAT
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
ENDS
SW
SE
RTJ
RTJ
7
6
6
- 1
- 1
2-3
4 12
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
SW
SE
RTJ
RTJ
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A105 body
ASTM A216 WCB body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
- 1
- 1
23
4 12
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
SW
SE
RTJ
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A105 body
ASTM A216 WCB body
Use gate valves
- 1
23
4 12
Class 1500
Class 1500
Class 1500
SW
RTJ
RTJ
ASTM A105 body

ASTM A216 WCB body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
7
6
6
6
DESCRIPTION
ASTM A105 Body
ASTM A105 Body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
ASTM A216 WCB Body
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 19 of 241

PIPELINE NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The specified materials in the line classes are acceptable to a design temperature of -40 C provided that
pipe runs do not exceed 50m in length. If pipe run lengths exceed 50m, materials meeting CSA Z662
category 2 requirements must be used if the design temperature is lower than -29C. Line pipe material
shall be ordered as CSA Z245.1 grade 359 Cat II, sour, unless otherwise determined by the Pipeline
Coordinator responsible.
Refer to Material Selection Section for material properties. Line pipe wall thicknesses are minimum
requirements. Applicable codes and regulatory standards may require additional thickness.
Dual certified flanges are acceptable for use.
Threaded joints on primary piping may be installed in sweet service, but should be minimized in sour
service. Allowable examples for primary sour service are pressure and temperature indicators. Other
uses shall be approved by the design engineer. Threaded joints are permitted in sour service on
secondary connections downstream of flanged connections where isolation from the main process is
possible.
Wall thickness to match pipe schedule.
To be used when mating to flanged nozzles.
These valves shall be used only for vent, drain, and instrument connections unless otherwise approved
by the Company.
Install in horizontal position with cover up.
Install in horizontal position with cover up or in vertical position with upward flow.
10.
The Line Pipe thicknesses listed were calculated using a design factor of 0.8, temperature factor 1.0, and
location factor 0.9 for class 1 locations only. Other location classes will require calculation to determine
required wall thickness.
11.
All welding shall meet the requirements of CSA Z662 for sour service.
12.
Flange pressure ratings in the table are based on CSA Z245.12 or ASME B16.5 which ever is more
stringent.
13.
Transition pieces between lengths of Line pipe and riser shall be fabricated with ASTM seamless pipe with
a minimum yield strength of 359 Mpa. The minimum length of Transition Pieces shall be 1000 mm. Both
ends of the Transition Piece shall be machined to a 37.5 bevel. The riser end of the Transition Piece shall
have a thickness as per the specification table. The Line pipe end of the Transition Piece shall be machined
to match the nominal thickness of the Line pipe. This machined area shall be either twice the diameter or
50 mm long at a minimum, whichever is greater.
14.
All risers are to be designed according to CSA Z662. Riser material can be dual certified to both CSA and
ASTM standards.
15.
Elbows, tees and other fittings for the above-ground part of the pipeline may be dual certified to ASTM and
CSA Z245.1.
16.
With the written approval of CNRL Pipeline Supervisor, the pipeline may be designated a sweet service
pipeline and the following changes may be granted:
The inspection scope may be reduced for sweet service to 15% RT; and
The use of fittings that have a minimum design metal temperatures of -29C (-20F), i.e. A105 carbon
steel, may be used.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
17.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 20 of 241
Pressure and temperature rating may be limited by certain components permitted by this specification.
Refer to manufacturers recommended pressure-temperature restrictions.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 21 of 241
THERMAL CLASS BTZ-1 300# RATING

SERVICE:
ABOVE GROUND Sweet Emulsion
BASIS:
Design Code
CSA Z662-03
Pressure Limit @ Temperature

Temp. oF
-20 to 100
(oC)
(-29 to 38)
MAWP, psig
719
(kPag)
(4960)
Required Corrosion Allowance:
Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
ITEM
200
300
400
(93)
(149)
(204)
675
655
635
(4654)
(4516)
(4378)
1/16 (1.6 mm)
P1 Groups 1 and 2; Carbon Steel
100% Visual Inspection, 100% RT of circumference on 15% of
butt welds and 10% MPI or LPI of socket welds per
welder/welding operator not radiographed. 5% RT of socket
welds for fit-up only.
On welds >1.25 (31.8mm) in thickness (CSA Z662 Clause
7.9.16.1)
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
- 1
- 2
2 24
Sch. XXS
Sch. XXS
Calculate W.T.
SE
BW SW
BW
A106 Gr. B, SMLS

A106 Gr. B, SMLS
CSA Z245.1, Grade
359 or higher,
Seamless or ERW
(30)
(30)
- 2
Sch XXS
BW SW SE
A106 Gr. B, SMLS
(29)
< 2
2 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
WN SW SE
WN
A105N
CSA Z245.12
(9) (28) (31)

(25) (28)
(31)
2 10
300 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12
12 24
300 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12
(25) (28)
(31)
(25) (28)
(31)
- 1
2
2 24
3000#
Sch XXS
W.T. to match pipe
SW SE
BW
BW
A105N
A105N
CSA Z245.11
(2) (29)
(2) (29)
(9) (31)
- 1
3000#
SW SE
A105N
(2) (29)
- 1
Sch XXS
SW SE
A234 Gr. WPB
(4)
- 1
- 4
3000#
3000#
SW SE
BW
A105N
A105N
(2) (29)
(2) (9) (29)
PIPE:
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
ORIFICE
FLANGES:
FITTINGS:
UNIONS:
SWAGES:
OLETS:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 22 of 241
BLINDS:
- 14
2 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
- 1
3000# SOLID HEX

HEAD
A516 Gr. 70N

A516 Gr. 70N
(5)
(6)
A105N
(29)
PLUGS:
SE
BOLTING:
STUDS
HEX NUTS
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
GASKETS:
- 24
300 Class RF
Spiral Wound
3.2mm
316 SS, nonasbestos, inner ring
VALVE SPECIFICATIONS: See section 36

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
MIN. Class 800

MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300, GEAR OPERATED
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
USE GATE
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300, GEAR OPERATED, TRUNNION
Class 300, GEAR OPERATED, TRUNNION
1
2 10
12 24
GLOBE:
1
1
2 4
BALL:
6 24
1
1
2 3
4
2
3 4
6 24
JOINT
TYPE
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
NOTE
VALVE CODE
GACN6CN
GACN7CN
GACN8CN
GABN1CN
GABN1CN
GABN3CN
GABN1CN09
GABN3CN09
LCCN6CN
LCCN7CN
LCCN8CN
LCBN1CN
LCBN1CN
LCBN3CN
BACN6AN
BACN7AN
BACN8AN
BABN1AN
BABN1CR
BABN3CR
BABN1CR09
BABN3CR09
BTBN1CF
BTBN3CF
BTBN1CR
BTBN3CR
BTBN1CR09
BTBN3CR09
Rev.
Section Number
1.0
CHECK:
Page
Page 23 of 241
1
2 24
NEEDLE:
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
MIN. Class 800, LIFT

Class 300, LIFT
Class 300, SWING
Class 300, SWING
Class 6000, HAND OP., MxF
Class 6000, HAND OP., FxF
SE
SW
RF
RF
BW
SE
SE
(18)
(18)
CLCN6CN
CLCN7CN
CLBN1CN
CSBN1CN
CSBN3CN
NDEX6BN
NDEX6CN
NOTE: Valves listed above are for above ground service only.
VALVE MATERIALS (13):

(ASTM, NACE, SPECIFIED MATERIAL)
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
GATE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
GLOBE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
CHECK
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
NEEDLE
T316SS
Packed T316SS
NACE MR 0175
BALL
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 24 of 241
THERMAL CLASS BTSZ-1 300# RATING

SERVICE:
BASIS:
DESIGN
CODE
CSA Z662-03
ABOVE GROUND -Sour Produced Gas

Temp. oF
-20 to 100
(oC)
(-29 to 38)
MAWP, psig
740
(kPag)
(5102)
Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
200
300
400
(93)
(149)
(204)
675
655
635
(4654)
(4516)
(4378)
1/8 (3.2 mm)
P1 Groups 1 and 2; Carbon Steel, SOUR SERVICE
100% Visual Inspection, 100% RT of butt welds. 5% RT of
socket welds for fit-up only. 100% MPI on socket welds.
Welding preheat must be maintained above 38C.
PWHT as per CSA Z662-07, Clause 7.9.16.1
*Note: Refer to NACE RP 0472, and CNRL Sour Service
Supplement 8.02, Paragraph 12.5 for details on hardness

values required.
ITEM
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
< 2
2 24
Sch. XXS
Calculate W.T.
BW SW
BW
A106 Gr. B, SMLS

CSA Z245.1, Grade
359 or higher,
Seamless or ERW,
Sour Service
(30)
- 2
Sch XXS
BW SW SE
A106 Gr. B, SMLS
(29)(30)
< 2
2 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
WN SW
WN
A105N
CSA Z245.12, SS
(9) (28) (31)

(25) (28)
(31)
2 10
300 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12, SS
12 24
300 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12, SS
(25) (28)
(31)
(25) (28)
(31)
- 1
2
2 24
3000#
Sch XXS
W.T. to match pipe
SW
BW
BW
A105N
A105N
CSA Z245.11, SS
(2) (29)
(2) (29)
(9) (31)
- 1
3000#
SW
A105N
(2) (29)
- 1
Sch XXS
SW SE
A234 Gr. WPB
(4)
PIPE:
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
ORIFICE
FLANGES:
FITTINGS:
UNIONS:
SWAGES:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 25 of 241
OLETS:
- 1
- 4
3000#
3000#
- 14
2 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
- 1
3000# SOLID HEX

HEAD
SW SE
BW
A105N
A105N
(2) (29)
(2) (9) (29)
A516 Gr. 70N

A516 Gr. 70N
(5)
(6)
A105N
(29)
BLINDS:
PLUGS:
SE
BOLTING:
STUDS
HEX NUTS
A193 Gr. B7M

A194 Gr. 2HM
GASKETS:
- 24
300 Class RF
Spiral Wound
3.2mm

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
MIN. Class 800

MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
USE GATE
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
1
2 10
12 24
GLOBE:
1
2 4
BALL:
6 24
1
1
2 3
4
JOINT
TYPE
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
NOTE
VALVE CODE
GACS6CN
GACS7CN
GACS8CN
GABS1CN
GABS1CN
GABS3CN
GABS1CN09
GABS3CN09
LCCS6CN
LCCS7CN
LCCS8CN
LCBS1CN
LCBS1CN
LCBS3CN
BACS6AN
BACS7AN
BACS8AN
BABS1AN
BABS1CR
BABS3CR
BABS1CR09
BABS3CR09
Rev.
Section Number
1.0
3 4
6 24
1
1
2 24
NEEDLE:
Page
Page 26 of 241
CHECK:
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
Class 300
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
BTBS1CF
BTBS3CF
BTBS1CR
BTBS3CR
BTBS1CR09
BTBS3CR09

Class 300, LIFT
Class 300, SWING
Class 300, SWING
SE
SW
RF
RF
BW
SE
SE
CLCS6CN
CLCS7CN
CLBS1CN
CSBS1CN
CSBS3CN
NDEX6BN
NDEX6CN
(18)
(18)

COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
GATE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#10 NACE MR 0175
GLOBE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#10 NACE MR 0175
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
CHECK
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#10 NACE MR 0175
NEEDLE
T316SS
Packed T316SS
NACE MR 0175
BALL
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#10 NACE MR 0175
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 27 of 241
THERMAL CLASS BTZ 300# RATING

SERVICE:
UNDERGROUND Steam Boiler Feedwater, Boiler Condensate

The pressure limits at temperature for the underground pipelines are all project specific. Limiting
factors may include stress analysis results, coating limitations in respect to temperature, etc.
BASIS:
Design Code
CSA Z662-03

Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
ITEM
1/16 (1.6 mm)

100% visual on all welds
100% RT of circumference of 15% of butt welds
10% MT on all fillet and socket welds
7.9.16.1)
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
- 1
2 24
Sch. XXS
Calculate W.T.
BW SW
BW
A106 Gr. B, SMLS

CSA Z245.1, Grade
359 or higher,
seamless or ERW
(30)
Sch XXS
BW SW SE
A106 Gr. B, SMLS
(29)
1
2 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
WN SW
WN
A105N
CSA Z245.12
(9) (28) (31)

(25) (28)
(31)
- 1
2 24
3000#
W.T. to match pipe
SW
BW
A105N
CSA Z245.11
(2) (29)
(9) (31)
- 1
Sch XXS
SW
A234 Gr. WPB
(4)
- 1
- 4
3000#
3000#
SW
BW
A105N
A105N
(2) (29)
(2) (9) (29)
- 14
16 24
300 Class RF
300 Class RF
A516 Gr. 70N

A516 Gr. 70N
(5)
(6)
- 1
3000#
SOLID HEX HEAD
A105N
(29)
PIPE:
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
FITTINGS:
SWAGES:
OLETS:
BLINDS:
PLUGS:
SE
BOLTING:
STUDS
HEX NUTS
GASKETS:
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 28 of 241
- 24
300 Class RF
Spiral Wound
3.2mm

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
MIN. Class 800

MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 300 BB WG
Class 300 BB WG
Class 300 BB WG
MIN. 6000 # WP Needle
MIN. Class 800 T BB
MIN. Class 800 T BB
Class 300 T BB
Class 300 T BB
Class 300 T BB
USE GATE
MIN. Class 800, LIFT T BB
Class 300, LIFT
Class 300, SWING
Class 300, SWING
1
2 10
12 24
GLOBE:
1
2 4
CHECK:
6 24
1
1
2 24
JOINT
TYPE
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
SW
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
SW
RF
RF
BW
NOTE
VALVE CODE
GACT6CN
GACT7CN
GACT8CN
GABT1CN
GABT1CN
GABTCN
GABT1CN09
GABT3CN09
NDET7FN
LCCT7CN
LCCN8CN
LCBT1CN
LCBT1CN
LCBT3CN
(18)
(18)
CLCT7CN
CLBT1CN
CSBT1CN
CSBT3CN

COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
GATE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
GLOBE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
BALL
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 29 of 241
THERMAL CLASS CTLZ-1 600# RATING

SERVICE:
ABOVE GROUND Sweet Low Temperature Fuel Gas
BASIS:
Design Code
CSA Z662-03

Temp. oF
-50 to 100
(oC)
(-45 to 38)
MAWP, psig
1440
(kPag)
(9930)
Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
ITEM
200
300
400
(93)
(149)
(204)
1350
1315
1270
(9308)
(9067)
(8757)
1/16 (1.6 mm)
100% Visual Inspection, 100% RT of circumference on 15%
of butt welds and 10% MPI or LPI of socket welds per
welder/welding operator not radiographed. 5% RT of socket
welds for fit-up only.
7.9.16.1)
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
- 1
- 2
2 24
Sch. 160
Sch. 80
Calculate W.T.
SE
BW SW
BW
A333 Gr. 6
A333 Gr. 6
CSA Z245.1, Grade
359 or higher, Cat II,
M45C, ERW
(30)
(30)
- 2
Sch XXS
BW SW SE
A333 Gr. 6
(29)
< 2
2 24
600 Class RF
600 Class RF
WN SW SE
WN
A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1

CSA Z245.12
(9) (28) (31)

(25) (28)
(31)
2 10
600 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12
12 24
600 Class RF
WN
CSA Z245.12
(25) (28)
(31)
(25) (28)
(31)
- 2
2 24
6000#
BW SW SE
BW
A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1

CSA Z245.11
(2) (29)
(9) (31)
- 1
6000#
SW SE
A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1
(2) (29)
SW SE
A420 Gr. WPL6
(4)
SW SE
BW
A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1

A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1
(2) (29)
(2) (9) (29)
PIPE:
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
ORIFICE
FLANGES:
FITTINGS:
UNIONS:
SWAGES:
- 1
OLETS:
- 1
- 4
BLINDS:
6000#
6000#
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 30 of 241
- 10
2 24
600 Class RF
600 Class RF
- 1
6000# SOLID HEX

HEAD
A516 Gr. 70N

A516 Gr. 70N
(5)
(6)
A350 Gr. LF2 Cl 1
(29)
PLUGS:
SE
BOLTING:
STUDS
HEX NUTS
A320 Gr. L7 (22)

A194 Gr. 7M (22)
GASKETS:
- 24
600 Class RF
Spiral Wound
3.2mm

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
MIN. Class 800

MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
USE GATE
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
MIN. Class 800
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
Class 600
1
2 6
8 24
GLOBE:
1
2 4
BALL:
6 24
1
1
2 3
4
2
3
4 24
CHECK:
JOINT
TYPE
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
SE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
RF
BW
SE
NOTE
VALVE CODE
GACC6CN
GACC7CN
GACC8CN
GACC1CN
GACC1CN
GACC3CN
GACC1CN09
GACC3CN09
LCCC6CN
LCCC7CN
LCCC8CN
LCCC1CN
LCCC1CN
LCCC3CN
BACC6AN
BACC7AN
BACC8AN
BACC1AN
BACC1CR
BACC3CR
BACC1CR09
BACC3CR09
BTCC1CF
BTCC3CF
BTCC1CR
BTCC3CR
BTCC1CR09
BTCC3CR09
CLCC6CN
Rev.
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 31 of 241
1
2 24
NEEDLE:
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name

Class 600, LIFT
Class 600, SWING
Class 600, SWING
SW
RF
RF
BW
SE
SE
(18)
(18)
CLCC7CN
CLCC1CN
CSCC1CN
CSCC3CN
NDEX6BN
NDEX6CN

COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
GATE
A352 LCC or A350 LF2
#8
GLOBE
#8
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
CHECK
#8
NEEDLE
T316SS
Packed T316SS
NACE MR 0175
BALL
#8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 32 of 241
THERMAL CLASS ETZ-1 1500# RATING

SERVICE:
BASIS:
CSA Z662-03
ABOVE GROUND Steam Distribution Pipelines

Design Pressure and Temperature:
Temp. oF
669
(oC)
(354)
MAWP, psig
2500
(kPag)
(17237)
Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
ITEM
0
100% Visual Inspection, 100% RT of circumference on
100% of butt welds and 100% of socket welds per
welder/welding operator.
7.9.16.1)
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
- 6
8 - 20
Sch. 160
Calculate W.T.
BW SW
BW
(30)
(7)
18 - 32
Calculate W.T.
BW
18 32
Calculate W.T.
BW
A106 Gr. B SMLS

CSA Z245.1, Grade
448, Cat II, Q&T,
Seamless
CSA Z245.1, Grade
448, Cat II, DSAW
CSA Z245.1, Grade
550, Cat II, DSAW
- 2
Sch XXS
SW SE
A106 Gr. B SMLS
(29) (30)
PIPE:
(7)
(7)
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
Not Allowed
(26) (32)
Not Allowed
(26)
ORIFICE
FLANGES:
FITTINGS:
- 1
9000#
SW
A105N
2 6
8 20
Sch. 160
Calculate W.T.
BW
BW
18 32
Calculate W.T.
BW
A105N
CSA Z245.11, Grade
448, Cat II, Q&T
CSA Z245.11, Grade
550, Cat II
(23) (25)
(29)
(25) (29)
(25)
(25)
UNIONS:
Not Allowed
(26)
SWAGES:
- 1
OLETS:
XXS
SW
A234 Gr. WPB
(24) (29)
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 33 of 241
- 1
9000#
SW
A105N
2 - 3
Sch. 160
BW
A105N
(23) (25)
(29)
(25) (29)
BLINDS:
Not Allowed
(26) (32)
Not Allowed
(26)
PLUGS:
BOLTING:
STUDS
NUTS
N.A.
N.A.
(26)
(26)
N.A.
(26)
GASKETS:

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
- 1
Class 1500, OS&Y, Wheel Op.
- 1
2 - 4
6 - 16
3 - 4
6 - 16
- 1
2 - 4

Class 1500, Sch 160, OS&Y, Wheel Op.
Class 1500, Sch 160, OS&Y, Gear Op.
Class 1500, Sch 160, Wheel Op.
Class 1500, Sch 160, Gear Op.
Class 1500, Sch 160, OS&Y, Wheel Op.,
Pressure Seal
Use Gate Valves (Parallel Slide)
Class 1500, Swing Type, Bolted Cap
Class 1500, Lift/Piston, Bolted Cap
Class 1500, Sch 160, Swing, Pressure Seal
PARALLEL
SLIDE:
Y-GLOBE:
CHECK:
6 - 16
- 1
- 1
6-16
JOINT
TYPE
SW
NOTE
VALVE CODE
(23)
(27)
GAET7CN
SWxSE
BW
BW
BW
BW
SW
BW
SW
SW
BW
* Parallel Slide Gate Valve to be used as last isolation valve to main header
GAET8CN
GAET3EN
GPET3EN09
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 34 of 241

COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
BOLTING STUDS
-NUTS .
GATE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
BOLTING STUDS
-NUTS .
CHECK
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
PARALLEL SLIDE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
Y-GLOBE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
Additional Information and Requirements for ETZ-1:

The pipe will be installed above ground on structural supports, insulated and covered with aluminum
jacket.
Pipes 16 and less shall be seamless only. Seamless pipe shall be supplied in the quenched and
tempered condition.
24 pipes are preferred to be seamless. If longitudinally welded pipe is proposed, the mill should
provide mechanical test results of the weld procedure at the elevated temperature. Pipe numbers shall
be permanently marked on the outside of each length of pipe (one end).
The required pipe and components shall be field weldable without Post-Weld Heat Treatment
(PWHT) using conventional welding procedures approved by CNRL.
Material Certificate to EN 10204 3.1B/C is preferable. (European pipe mills only)
Data may be supplied to support field weldability such as typical grain sizes, hardness and any other
information the Manufacturer may consider relevant to prove product is suitable for the design
parameters.
As part of the quotation for supply of line pipe, the Manufacturer shall submit Manufacturing
Procedure Specification (MPS) for approval by the Purchaser.
Transition pieces are to be fabricated using the higher grade material
Beveling to be in accordance with CSA Z662-07, Section 7.2, Figure 7.1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 35 of 241
THERMAL CLASS ETVZ-1 1500# RATING

SERVICE:
BASIS:
CSA Z662
Latest Edition
ABOVE GROUND Steam Distribution Pipeline Valve Assemblies

Design Pressure and Temperature:
Temp. oF
669
(oC)
(354)
MAWP, psig
2500
(kPag)
(17237)
Material Group:
Inspection:
Heat Treatment:
Maximum Weld Metal Hardness:
ITEM
0
100% Visual Inspection, 100% RT of circumference on
100% of butt welds and 100% of socket welds per
welder/welding operator.
7.9.16.1)
200 Brinell Number
SIZE (NPS)
RATING
JOINT TYPE
MATL. SPEC.
NOTES
- 1
2 4
6
8 24
Sch. 160
Sch. 160
Sch. XXS
Calculate W.T.
BW SW
BW
BW
BW
A106 Gr. B SMLS

A106 Gr. B SMLS
A106 Gr. B SMLS
A106 Gr. B SMLS
(7)
- 1
Sch XXS
SW
A106 Gr. B SMLS
8 24
Class 1500 RF (32)
WN
A105N
(9)
- 1
2 24
6000#
Sch. to match pipe
SW
BW
A105N
A234 Gr. WPB
(9)
14
Class 1500
BW
A105N only
(9)
- 1
Sch. XXS
SW
A234 Gr. WPB
(4)
- 1
2 - 4
6000#
6000#
SW
BW
A105N
A105N
(9)
- 8
10 24
Class 1500 RF
Class 1500 RF
A516 Gr. 70N

A516 Gr. 70N
(5) (16)
(6)
- 1
6000# SOLID HEX

HEAD
PIPE:
NIPPLES:
FLANGES:
ORIFICE
FLANGES:
Not Allowed
FITTINGS:
HIGH
PRESSURE
COUPLINGS:
SWAGES:
OLETS:
BLINDS:
PLUGS:
SE
A105N
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 36 of 241
BOLTING:
STUDS
NUTS
A193 Gr. B7
A194 Gr. 2H
GASKETS:
- 8
Class 1500
10 24
Class 1500
Spiral Wound
3.2mm
Oval Ring
316 SS, non-asbestos,

inner ring
316 SS, non-asbestos,
inner ring
(16)

(ASME B16.5, B16.10, B16.11, B16.25, B16.34, API 598)
VALVE TYPE
SIZE (NPS)
DESCRIPTION
GATE:
MIN. Class 1500, BB WG

MIN. Class 1500, BB WG
Class 1500, BB WG
Class 1500 PS WG
Class 1500 PS WG
Class 1500, PS, PS GEAR OPERATED
MIN. 6000 # WP Needle
1
2 4
6 8
10 24
GLOBE:
1
1
MIN. Class 1500 Y

MIN. Class 1500 Y
Class 1500 Y
Class 1500 Y
Class 1500 Y
Class 1500 Y PS
Class 1500 Y PS
USE GATE (PARALLEL SLIDE)
MIN. Class 1500, LIFT Y
Class 1500, LIFT Y
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
2 8
Class 1500, PS SWING

RF
BW
10 24

RTJ
BW
1
2 3
4
CHECK:
JOINT
TYPE
SW
SWxSE
RF
RF
BW
RF
BW
RTJ
BW
SW
6 24
1
1
SW
RF
NOTE
(16)
(16)
(16)
(16)
(16)
(16)
(20)
(16)
(20)
(16)
(20)
(20)
(20)
(20)
* Parallel Slide Gate Valve to be used as last isolation valve to main header
VALVE CODE
GAET7CN
GAET8CN
GAET1CN
GAET1EN
GAET3EN
GPET1EN09
GPET3EN09
GPET2EN09
GPET3EN09
NDET7FN
LCET7XN
LCET8XN
LCET1XN
LCET1XN
LCET3XN
LCET1SN
LCET3SN
CLET7XN
CLET1XN
CSET1EN
CSET3EN
CSET2EN
CSET3EN
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 37 of 241

COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
COMPONENT
BODY
BONNET
TRIM
GATE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
CHECK
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
GLOBE
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
NEEDLE
T316SS
Packed T316SS
NACE MR 0175
BALL
A216 WCB or A105
A216 WCB or A105
#8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 38 of 241

Thermal Pipeline Class Notes:
1. For pulsating (severe cycle) service radiography is required on 100% of the circumference of all
welds for new systems and piping modifications to existing systems (Less that 0.5 m3 / 18 cu.ft.). All
welds in pulsating service will be subject to post weld heat treatment unless otherwise approved by
the Owner.
2. For pulsating (severe cycle) service minimum 6000# forged steel socket weld fittings shall be used in
process piping.
3. For large, long life system requirements consider galvanized pipe and fittings using screwed end
connections throughout.
4. Use if large end is 1 NPS or smaller.
5. Spectacle Blind.
6. Blind and Spacer.
7. Calculate pipe wall thickness.
8. Calculate pipe wall thickness. The pipe wall thickness used shall be a minimum of 9.6 mm (0.375 in.)
or the calculated thickness if larger than 9.6 mm (0.375in.).
9. Wall thickness to match pipe schedule.
10. Tubing is preferred over screwed pipe for NPS to where possible and where support is not of
concern.
11. Use threaded tee and swage fittings (SE).
12. Flat faced flanges may be used where required for connection to flat faced flanges on equipment. In
such cases use 1.6 mm (1/16) sheet gasket (Garlock or equal) over the full face.
13. Castings of material specification A352 Gr. LCB (Group 1.3 Material) have a lower maximum
working pressure than Group 1.1 Materials. Therefore, pressure piping systems containing valves
made from A352 Gr. LCB material (Group 1.3 Material) must have their piping class maximum
working pressure reduced to the level given in ASME B16.5 Table 2-1.3 governing Group 1.3
Material.
14. For sour salt water service, use Inconel spirotallic gaskets rather than 316SS material.
15. For SE piping, pipe schedule should be increased by one schedule or as necessary to meet minimum
thickness requirements as per Code. For NPS to NPS threaded connections, use Sch XXS.
16. Where required by design, RTJ Flanges maybe used instead of RF Flanges.
17. Where it is not practical to butt weld 2 fittings socket welds are permitted on low pressure (up to
Class 600)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 39 of 241
18. Use piston non-slam spring assist type check valve with soft seat in final discharge line of
reciprocating gas compressor service.
19. Use of flanges to be discussed with Operations Foreman before using in design of piping design or
before installation.
20. Use of check valves to be discussed with Area Operations Foreman before installing.
21. Welded connections preferred, if flanges are required, then use as specified.
22. For continued use below 20 C use A320 Gr.L7M studs and A194 Gr.7M nuts. Otherwise B7M
studs and 2HM nuts are acceptable.
23. For high point vent use: NPT Threadolet c/w plug.
24. Swages fabricated to MSS-SP-95, end preparation to match joining fittings.
25. Wall Thickness should correspond to the joining pipe wall thickness or schedule. The ends shall be
taper-bored to suit matching pipe wall if fitting thickness exceeds pipe wall by more than 1.6 mm.
26. Used only when approved by Mechanical Engineering & CNRL Operations.
27. Mainly used for drain and instrument root valve connection.
28. Dual certified flanges (ASME B16.5 and CSA Z245.12) are acceptable for use. CSA Z245.12 is the
minimum acceptable certification.
29. All materials must meet the requirements of CSA Z662-07 and be listed on Table 5.3. All ASME
material must be certified for use in pipelines by CSA.
30. Material to be used for vent and drain connections only.
31. Material Grade and Category to match (or exceed) the mating pipe grade and category.
32. RTJ flanges are acceptable for the hot air warm up tees
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
1.8
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 40 of 241
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Appendix I
Regulation Breaks between Oil & Gas Act, Pipeline Act and Safety Codes Act.
Appendix II
Branch Table
Appendix III
Piping Class Notes
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 41 of 241
Pipeline Line Classes Appendix I
Appendix I
Regulation Breaks between Oil & Gas Act, Pipeline Act and Safety Codes Act
1.
Gas Well site with no Dehydrator or Separator, with or without a lease block valve, including a pipeline
leaving the well site.
Note that pig senders/receivers, where present, are located on the Pipeline side of the spec break.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
2.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 42 of 241

Gas well site with wellsite heater, with or without a lease block valve, including a pipeline leaving the
well site.
Note that pig senders/receivers, where present, are located on the Pipeline side of the spec break
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
3.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 43 of 241
Gas well site with a dehydrator and/or separator, with or without a lease block valve including a pipeline leaving
the well site.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
4.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 44 of 241
Gas Satellite or Group Gas Gathering Facility.

Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
5.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 45 of 241
Compressor Station.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
6.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 46 of 241
Source water collection, injection and disposal. Wells are off lease.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
7.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 47 of 241
Oil/Gas Satellite with Field Header to Group Pipelines.

Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
8.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 48 of 241
Oil Battery Facility

Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
9.
Heavy Oil / In-situ Steam Flood Facilities
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 49 of 241
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2008
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Page
Page 50 of 241
Pipeline Line Classes Appendix II
Appendix II
Critical Branch Table, Design Temperatures up to 446F (230C)
BRANCH
NOMINAL
DIAMETER
24
20
18
16
14
TR
12
TR
TR
10
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
TR
IB
IB
IB
IB
TR
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
IB
14
12
10
8
6
4
3
MAIN LINE NONMINAL DIAMETER
24
20
18
16
T
T
Legend
IB:
T:
TR:
W:
Integrally reinforced insert type branch fitting

Straight Tee or Reducing Tee where applicable
Reducing Tee or Reducer
Weldolet (Note 1)
Note 1. Integrally reinforced branch connections are permitted outside the sizes shown in the branch
connection tables. Designer shall check weld thickness of integrally reinforced branch
connections to determine if PWHT is required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 51 of 241
Pipeline Line Classes Appendix III
Appendix III
Piping class is organized on the basis of pressure rating and the service.
The primary letters A to F are representative of class 150 to 2500
Primary letters
A
B
C
D
E
F
Meaning
Class 150
Class 300
Class 600
Class 900
Class 1500
Class 2500
The subsequent letters indicate the service, as is listed below:

Secondary Letter (s) /
Numbers
L
S
T
V
Z
1
Example:
B T
Meaning
Low Temperature Service
Sour Service
Thermal Group Issued
Valve Assembly
Pipeline Specification to CSA Z662
Above Ground Pipeline
Thermal Issued
Class 300
See Pipeline Service Classes on page 7.
100% VT for all sizes and

thicknesses

thicknesses
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Fillets, socket, 100% MT for all sizes and

attachment, and thicknesses [Note 5]
seal welds
10% RT per welder /welding

operator on a progressive
production basis for all sizes
thicknesses
3.0
Section Name
100% RT or UT for branch > NPS 100% VT for all sizes and
thicknesses
4 and t> (19mm)
100% MT for branch NPS 4 and
t (19mm)
100% VT for all sizes with branch
t (19mm)
100% RT or UT for > NPS 2 with

t> (19mm)
production basis for all sizes with
t (19mm)
100% VT for all sizes with t
(19mm)
Temperatures between 350F

(175C) and 750F (400C) inclusive
All others
with all pressures over 1025 pisg
(7100 kPag)
Rev.
Welded branch 100% RT or UT for > NPS 4

100% MT for NPS 4
connections
(size indicated
is branch size)
[Notes 3 and 4]
100% RT or UT for > NPS 2

production basis for NPS 2
100% MT for NPS 2
Temperatures over 750F (400C)

and at all pressures
Section Number
Butt welds
(girth and
longitudinal)
[See Note 1]
Type of Weld
Piping Design Conditions and Nondestructive Examination
Page
Page 52 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
1.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 53 of 241
General Notes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
All welds shall undergo a visual examination in addition to the type of specific
NDE specified.
NPS Nominal pipe size.
RT radiographic examination, UT ultrasonic examination, MT magnetic
examination, VT visual examination.
For NDE of pressure retaining component, refer to the specifications listed in
ASME Section II.
Acceptance standards for non-destructive examinations performed are listed in
Appendix II.
Notes:
1. The thickness of butt welds is defined as the thicker of the two abutting ends after end
2.
3.
4.
5.
preparation.
RT may be used as an alternative to MT when it is performed in accordance with Para.
136.4.5 in ASME B31.1.
RT or UT of branch welds shall be performed before any non-integral reinforcing material is
applied.
In lieu of volumetric examination (RT or UT) of welded branch connections when required
above, surface examination (MT) is acceptable and when used shall be performed at the
lesser of one-half of the weld thickness or each (12.5 mm) of weld thickness and all
accessible final weld surfaces.
Fillet welds not exceeding (6mm) throat thickness which are used for permanent
attachment of non-pressure retaining parts are exempt from MT requirements of the above
table.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
2.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 54 of 241
Introduction and Line Classes Wellsites
2 . Introduction and Line Classes Wellsites

Table of Contents
2.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 54
SCOPE
2.1
2.1.1
The Company policy has been changed to build well-site facilities designated under the
Oil & Gas Act according to CSAZ662 standards rather than ASME B31.3. See CNRL
General Specifications for ASME B31.3 Line classes or other information if required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Page
Page 55 of 241
Pipeline Welding
3 . Pipeline Welding
Table of Contents
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 55
WPS/PQR AND INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS ...................... 55
WELDERS AND WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION TESTS
56
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................. 56
WELDING TECHNIQUE .............................................................. 57
PREHEATING ............................................................................. 57
FILLET WELDS .......................................................................... 58
FIELD INSPECTION ................................................................... 58
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING ................................................... 58
WELD REPAIRS .......................................................................... 58
INCLEMENT WEATHER ............................................................. 59
WELDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUR SERVICE ................... 59
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 59
SCOPE
3.1
3.1.1
This welding specification establishes the quality of work and the procedures to be
followed for welding on piping systems, excluding steam distribution pipelines.
WPS/PQR AND INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS
3.2
3.2.1
The following welding processes are covered by this sub-section:
3.2.1.1
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
(SMAW or Stick)
3.2.1.2
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW or MIG)
3.2.1.3
Flux Cored Arc Welding
(FCAW)
3.2.2
The Contractor shall submit a registered Quality Control Manual, and all Welding
Procedure Specifications (WPSs) that he intends to use to the Company for approval on
a project by-project basis.
3.2.3
The WPSs and PQR shall be qualified per Clause 7.2.5 of CSA Z662. The qualification
shall be documented.
3.2.4
Other procedures governing Non-Destructive Testing, Post Weld Heat Treatment and
Hardness Testing, as applicable to the project, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Company for approval.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
3.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 56 of 241
Pipeline Welding
WELDERS AND WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION TESTS
3.3
3.3.1
The Contractor shall only employ welders that are qualified to CSA Z662 and hold a
valid B pressure welding certificate registered with the ABSA or equivalent provincial
pressure ticket. The validity of this certificate shall be maintained during the entire
period when the welder is employed.
3.3.2
For the purpose of internal qualification a welder may be qualified by radiography of a

test weld at the discretion of the Welding/QC Inspector. The construction supervisor
(inspector) can elect whether to do radiography or destructive testing (bend tests) on the
weld coupon.
3.3.3
Welders continuously employed by a contractor/ company shall be required to re-qualify

at intervals of not greater then 2 years. Welders not so employed shall be required to requalify at intervals not greater than 1 year.
3.3.4
CNRL requires every welder coming onto a job site to do a weld test per contractors
welding procedure or have a valid performance test per applicable WPS.
3.3.5
For Shielded Metal Arc Welding a single test piece welded in the 6G position (45
inclined, fixed) may be substituted for a combined 2G and 5G test. This qualification
shall also permit the welder to make low pressure welds and horizontal roll welds. This
test will be completed in accordance with Contractor's approved and registered WPS and
PQR.
3.3.6
Qualification tests for other welding processes shall be conducted in accordance with
applicable codes and the associated WPS and PQR.
3.3.7
The Contractors QC Inspector shall complete the documentation and give a copy to the
CNRL representative/Welding inspector upon start of a project. For a specific project, the
CNRL Representative/Welding Inspector may be required to witness welder testing.
3.3.8
A record shall be made of the tests given to welders and of the detailed results of each
test. A list of qualified welders and the procedure specifications in accordance with which
they are qualified to weld shall be maintained. All qualified welders will be issued with a
unique identification symbol to identify their welds. This identification shall be applied
by the use of documented weld maps. Die-stamping shall not be permitted for such a
purpose.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
3.4
3.4.1
The work under this section of the specification covers welding on materials listed under
CSA Z662. All pipeline grades shall comply with CSA Z245.1.
3.4.2
Carbon Steel welding electrodes for SMAW process shall be in accordance with the
applicable requirements of CSA W48 and ASME Section II Part C. Acceptability of
electrodes must be demonstrated by submitting a registered WPS and PQR employing
such electrodes to the Company for approval.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
3.0
3.4.3
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 57 of 241
Pipeline Welding
All tools and equipment used in welding operations shall be in operating condition and
shall be of a capacity suited to the work for which they are employed. The Contractor
shall provide suitable wind guards, welders platforms or bell holes when conditions
warrant their use.
WELDING TECHNIQUE
3.5
3.5.1
Surface of areas to be welded, including 2 on either side of the base metal, shall be free
from dirt, grease, scale, oxide, paint, grit or any other foreign material which may
adversely affect the final weld quality.
3.5.2
Bevels shall be specified on WPS and all field cuts shall be normal to the axis of the pipe.
Miter cuts and welds are prohibited. Branch connections may be cut by hand torch.
3.5.3
To assure proper spacing and alignment, an approved lineup clamp shall be used.
3.5.4
For pipe of the same nominal wall thickness the maximum internal offset shall not exceed
2.4mm (3/32") or 25% of the thinner wall thickness, whichever is less. Where nominal
internal offset of the weld bevels exceed 2.4mm (3/32") then transition shall be made by
a horizontal cutback with a 30 slope one diameter or 50 mm (whichever is less) away
from the weld.
3.5.5
The pipe joint shall be supported to provide adequate working clearance around the pipe.
3.5.6
Only a qualified welder shall make tack welds and temporary attachment welds. Tack
welds shall be made with the same welding procedure that is to be used for the final
welding. Tack welds that have cracked shall be removed.
3.5.7
Grinding shall be done with wheels that have not been used on other materials.
PREHEATING
3.6
3.6.1
Preheat temperatures and inter-pass temperatures shall meet the requirements of the
relevant WPS and applicable Codes.
3.6.2
All joints shall be preheated as per approved welding procedure prior to welding. For
welding of dissimilar material having dissimilar preheating requirements, the higher
preheating temperature shall be used.
3.6.3
Preheating shall be done with a suitable method provided that it is uniform heating. In
order to prevent over heating no part of the joint shall be pre heated to a temperature in
excess of 200 C.
3.6.4
The pre-heat area shall be at least 20 cm (8") wide or 10 cm (4) on either side of the
weld center line. The pre heat band shall extend around the entire circumference of the
pipe.
3.6.5
Preheat temperatures shall be checked with temperature sensitive crayons, or by other

approved methods.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
3.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 58 of 241
Pipeline Welding
FILLET WELDS
3.7
3.7.1
The size of a fillet weld is stated as the leg length of the largest inscribed right isosceles
triangle. Fillet welds shall be slightly concave to slightly convex.
3.7.2
The minimum permissible dimensions for fillet weld used in the attachment of slip-on or
socket-welded joint shall 1.25t but not less then 4 mm. The minimum permissible
dimensions for fillet welds used in branch connections shall be as shown in CSA Z662.
FIELD INSPECTION
3.8
3.8.1
The Company may use any method of inspection necessary to verify the Contractors
quality control and ensure adherence to welding procedures.
3.8.2
The completed weld shall present a uniform and workman-like appearance and shall be
symmetrical to the centre line of the weld.
3.8.3
The weld shall be free from surface discontinuities.
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING
3.9
3.9.1
Weld quality will be checked by radiographic inspection, unless otherwise specified.

Defects located by non-destructive testing shall not exceed the limits of the standards of
acceptability outlined in Canadian Natural line classes specifications and the applicable
standard of CSA Z662. Where differences exist the more rigorous limits shall apply.
3.9.2
100% of field butt welds shall be radiographed for 100% of their circumference. For
non-sour, low pressure designs, the Company Engineer may specify a lower radiograph
sample, but not less than 15%. When random radiography is done, it shall be on an
ongoing (daily production) basis, and shall cover the work of each welder on the project.
3.10
WELD REPAIRS
3.10.1 Repairs to defects in welds shall be as follows:

9
With Canadian Naturals authorization it shall be permissible to repair
welds containing a repairable defect,
9
Before weld repairs are made, defect shall be entirely removed,
9
The length of repair welds shall be at least 50 mm,
9
The repair area of welds shall be inspected by the same means previously
detected. Where repairs are unacceptable, welds shall be completely
removed by cutting a cylinder containing the repaired welds or where
authorized by CNRL, further repairs shall be made.
9
The minimum preheat temperature of at least 120 C (248 F) shall be
used. Care should be taken to prevent overheating since no part of the
area shall be heated to a temperature in excess of 200 C (392 F) unless
the effects of the time-temperature relationship on the mechanical
properties of the pipe was determined and taken into consideration.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
3.11
Page
Page 59 of 241
Pipeline Welding
INCLEMENT WEATHER
3.11.1 Outdoor welding operations shall be suspended when, in the opinion of the Company's
representative, the weather conditions are unsuitable for welding.
3.12
WELDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUR SERVICE
3.12.1 Introduction
3.12.1.1
These specifications are for welding of pipelines that will be used in sour service,
as defined in CSA Z662 clause 8.0. All welds made to this specification will
undergo 100% radiographic inspection.
3.12.1.2
Acceptability will be based on CSA Z662. The Company QC/ Welding

Inspector shall be the sole judge to accept the welds.
3.12.2 Weld Repairs

3.12.2.1
Repairs will undergo radiographic inspection and this film will accompany the
original film as proof that the repair has been made successfully.
3.12.2.2
Cracks will not be permitted. Pipe welds containing cracks shall be removed by
cutting out the entire weld and replacing it with sound weld metal.
3.12.3 Incomplete Penetration or Lack of Fusion

3.12.3.1
These defects are not permitted and shall be removed by carbon arc gouging or
grinding and re-welding. Internal back welding is not allowed in pipeline welds.
3.12.4 Undercutting
3.12.4.1
Undercutting adjacent to the root bead shall not exceed 0.8mm (1/32") in depth
and shall not exceed 50 mm (1.96") in length, and such defects shall be separated
by 155mm (6") of sound weld metal.
3.12.5 Slag Inclusions

3.12.5.1
Unacceptable slag inclusions within the metal thickness will be removed by

carbon arc gouging or grinding and the area re-welded.
3.12.6 Porosity
3.12.6.1
3.13
Unacceptable porosity within the weld metal thickness will be removed by

grinding and the area re-welded.
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
3.13.1 The contractor is responsible to put QC package together, and he has to do it on an ongoing basis. As the Owners Inspector, the construction supervisor has to review this QC
package regularly (sign off on the date it is done) so as to assure himself that the work is
progressing according to plan and code. See section 31.0 of this manual.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
4.0
Page
Page 60 of 241
Wellsite Welding
4 . Wellsite Welding
Table of Contents
4.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 60
SCOPE
4.1
4.1.1
General Specifications for ASME B31.3 welding or other information if required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 61 of 241
Flare System Design
5 . Flare System Design

Table of Contents
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
SCOPE ........................................................................................
RELATED PRACTICES ...............................................................
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES ......................................................
RUPTURE DISKS ........................................................................
VACUUM RELIEF PROTECTION ...............................................
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE INSTALLATIONS ...........................
RELIEF DISCHARGE SYSTEM ...................................................
61
61
61
62
65
65
66
67
SCOPE
5.1
This sub-section addresses the general requirements and specifications for relief valves and
flare system design.
RELATED PRACTICES
5.2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
The legislation and associated regulations of the Province or Territory of

installation and the Government of Canada
API RP 520, Parts I and II Sizing, Selection and Installation of Pressure Relief
Devices in Refineries
API RP 521 Guide for Pressure Relieving and Depressuring Systems
API Standard 2000 Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks
API 526 Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sections I, IV and VIII
ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping
ASME/ANSI B31.3 Process Piping
DEFINITIONS
5.3
5.3.1
Accumulation the pressure increase over the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
(MAWP) of a vessel during discharge through the pressure relief valve expressed as a
percent of MAWP. The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code establish the maximum
allowable accumulations for operating contingencies and for fire contingencies.
5.3.2
Back Pressure a general term for the pressure existing at the outlet of a pressure relief
valve. When the pressure relief valve is closed, it is equal to the Superimposed Back
Pressure. When the pressure relief valve is open, it is equal to the sum of the
Superimposed Back Pressure and the Built-Up Back Pressure.
5.3.3
Built-Up Back Pressure the increase in back pressure at the pressure relief valve outlet
that develops as the result of flow after the pressure relief valve opens.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 62 of 241
Flare System Design
5.3.4
Design Pressure the gauge pressure used in the design of the vessel. Also see
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure.
5.3.5
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure the maximum gauge pressure permissible at the
top of a completed vessel in its operating position for a designated temperature. The
MAWP is stated on the vessel ASME code stamp and is the basis for the pressure setting
of the pressure relief valves protecting the vessel. The MAWP is generally equal to, or
slightly more than, the Design Pressure.
5.3.6
Maximum Superimposed Back Pressure the maximum value of the Superimposed Back
Pressure on an unopened pressure relief valve at the time the valve is required to operate.
In flare systems, it is a result of flow from other pressure relief valves and/or from other
simultaneous flaring.
5.3.7
Overpressure the pressure increase of the vessel over the Set Pressure of the pressure
relief valve. It is the same as Accumulation when the pressure relief valve is set at the
vessel MAWP.
5.3.8
Relief Valve an automatic pressure-relieving device actuated by the static pressure

upstream of the valve, which opens in proportion to the increase in pressure over the
opening pressure. A relief valve is used primarily for liquid service.
5.3.9
Rupture Disk a non-re-closing pressure relief device actuated by inlet static pressure
and designed to function by the bursting of a pressure-containing disk.
5.3.10 Safety Relief Valve a pressure relief valve characterized by rapid opening or pop
action or by opening in proportion to the increase in pressure over the opening pressure,
depending on application.
5.3.11 Safety Valve an automatic pressure-relieving device actuated by the static pressure
upstream of the valve and characterized by rapid full opening or pop action. It is used
for gas or vapor service.
5.3.12 Set Pressure the inlet gauge pressure at which the pressure relief valve is set to open
under service conditions. Set Pressure is the single valve of the intended Opening
Pressure and as such is independent of Superimposed Back Pressure.
5.3.13 Superimposed Back Pressure the static pressure existing at the outlet of an unopened
pressure relief valve at the time the valve is required to operate. It is the result of
pressure in the discharge system from other sources and may be constant or variable.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
5.4
5.4.1
Pressure relief devices shall be provided for all pressure vessels and pressure piping
systems in accordance with the regulations and Codes under which the vessel or piping
system was designed and fabricated. In all cases, it shall be at least equal to the
requirements of the applicable ASME Codes.
5.4.1.1
Vessels
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 63 of 241
Flare System Design
5.4.1.1.1
Pressure relief valves are required for all pressure vessels unless there is
a continuously open vent of adequate size.
5.4.1.1.2
Normally the pressure relief valve is located on the vessel. The relief
valve may be located on the interconnected piping if it is designed to
protect other downstream equipment that can not be isolated from the
source of overpressure.
5.4.1.2
Light Hydrocarbon Storage

Relief valves for butane and light hydrocarbons in storage areas shall be sized in
accordance with the standards of the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) Pamphlet No. 58 (latest version), and comparable Canadian Codes and
Standards, as applicable.
5.4.1.3
Boilers
Boiler safety valves shall have a capacity at least equal to the recommendations
of the boiler manufacturer and of ASME section I or IV as applicable.
5.4.1.4
Heat Exchangers
5.4.1.4.1
Pressure relief valves are required for blocked-in thermal expansion

conditions and for exchanger tube rupture in certain cases. Refer to API
RP521 for potential causes of overpressure and determination of
individual relieving rates.
5.4.1.4.2
A temperature relief valve for blocked-in liquid thermal expansion is

required for liquid filled equipment which may be blocked in and
exposed to a heat source other than fire.
5.4.1.4.3
When the operating pressure on the high-pressure side of a heat

exchanger is 200% or more of the design pressure of the low-pressure
side, the low-pressure side shall be protected with a safety relief valve.
This valve must be sized to relieve the fluid, which could enter this side,
from twice the cross sectional area of one tube. In the case of double
pipe exchangers, the Contractor shall take such steps, as deemed
necessary to ensure safe operation, subject to the approval of the
Company.
5.4.1.5
Piping
5.4.1.5.1
Pressure relief requirements for piping shall conform to ASME/ANSI

B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping Code.
5.4.1.5.2
A temperature relief valve for block-in thermal expansion is required for

liquid filled piping which may be blocked-in and exposed to a heat
source during normal plant operation other than fire. However, if the
temperature of the heat source is high enough to cause vaporization of
the liquid at relieving pressure, then a pressure relief valve shall be
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
5.0
Page
Page 64 of 241
Flare System Design

provided rather than a temperature relief valve. Heat sources to be
considered include the following:
9
tracing on liquid filled piping
9
sun radiant heat input to exposed, liquid filled
lines
9
heat exchanged to liquid filled, cold side of heat
exchangers
5.4.1.5.3
Pressure relief valve shall be provided for the piping systems when the
pressure can exceed the piping design pressure:
9
downstream or upstream of control valves
assuming that the control valve could move to
either an open or closed position
9
downstream or upstream of block valves
assuming that the block valve could be moved to
either an open or closed position, except for lock
or car sealed valves which shall be assumed to
remain in their locked or sealed positions
9
pressure relief valves required for piping may be
located on the piping or on interconnected
equipment.
5.4.1.6
Rotating and Mechanical Equipment
5.4.1.6.1
Pressure relief valves are required on the discharge of positive

displacement pumps where the stalling pressure exceeds the design
pressure of the pump, piping or other equipment on the discharge side of
the pump. Relief shall be to the pump suction or other safe point of
disposal.
5.4.1.6.2
Pressure relief valves are required on the discharge of each stage of

positive displacement compressors.
5.4.2
Safety and relief valves in operating areas shall be sized for the condition that requires
maximum discharge volume, including vaporization under fire.
5.4.3
Body materials shall conform to the CNR piping class and specifications for the specific
applications involved. Safety and relief valves venting into a closed system shall be
supplied with packed lifting components. All other valves shall have plain lifting
components, except those on reciprocating pumps and in liquid expansion service that
shall have plain caps. Where valves are installed in sour gas service or vent to a closed
system subject to sour gas, springs shall be aluminized, trim shall be 316 SS, fully
annealed, and the bonnet shall be of a sealed design.
5.4.4
All pressure relief devices are to be provided with proper protection to prevent the
possibility of valve seat or disk corrosion by water or other corrosive substances that may
collect and remain in contact with the valve seat or rupture disk. In the case of safety
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 65 of 241
Flare System Design
valves, drilling a small drain hole in the outlet piping connected to the valve may prevent
this problem. In the case of rupture disks, cover the relief outlet may achieve the desired
protection.
5.4.5
The Contractor shall test all safety relief valves, in-place when possible prior to initial
placement of pressure vessels or pressure piping systems in service. Any valve which
does not open within Code tolerances from the required set pressure shall be removed and
re-set by a service company registered with the applicable Provincial or Territorial
authorities for maintenance of pressure relief devices. A log of safety and relief valve
testing shall be prepared and provided to the Company by the Contractor as part of the
final Quality Control Report submitted in accordance with the Contractors registered
Quality Control Manual.
RUPTURE DISKS
5.5
5.5.1
The use of rupture disk shall be minimized and shall only be used in those circumstances
where use of spring loaded or pilot operated relief valves is inadequate or impractical.
5.5.2
Rupture disk devices may be used as secondary relief features on the discharge of
compressors. The bursting pressure of the disk shall not be less than 130% nor more than
140% of the design working pressure of the compressor cylinder and its discharge piping.
Each rupture disk shall be made of such material conforming to the manufacturers
recommendations for the specific type of service and be listed within the associated
ASME code.
5.5.3
Rupture disks should be considered in certain applications such as:

9
when very rapid pressure build-up will exceed the response time of a
pressure relief valve e.g. hydraulic transients, exchanger tube rupture
9
in series with pressure relief valves where valve leakage would be a
problem
9
in series with pressure relief valves for protection of the PRV from
excessive corrosion or fouling, unless purging can be used.
VACUUM RELIEF PROTECTION
5.6
5.6.1
Consideration shall be given to designing equipment for full vacuum to avoid the need
for vacuum relief protection.
5.6.2
Vacuum relief valves, of any type, which admit air into equipment containing
hydrocarbons or other flammable material, shall not be permitted if a flammable vaporair mixture can result.
5.6.3
All equipment not designed to withstand the maximum vacuum resulting from an
occurrence shall have vacuum relief protection against the occurrence.
5.6.4
Atmospheric storage tanks with fixed roofs shall have vacuum relief protection. This
generally consists of open vents or pressure-vacuum vent valves depending on the service
of the tank. Storage tanks must not operate with vapor-air temperatures in the flammable
range.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
5.6.5
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 66 of 241
Flare System Design
Low pressure storage tanks up to 15 psig shall have vacuum relief valves per API
Standard 2000, Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Storage Tanks. In addition,
these tanks should have a vacuum breaker/preventer system which admits gas prior to a
vacuum relief valve admitting air.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE INSTALLATIONS
5.7
5.7.1
Block Valves
5.7.1.1
Block valves may be installed under safety relief valves in locations where the
protected equipment cannot be removed from operation without necessitating a
plant or unit shutdown, provided that local regulations permit such valve
installations.
5.7.1.2
Inlet block valves shall at minimum be full port and of the same size as the
pressure relief valve inlet. The block valve size shall be increased where
necessary to meet the inlet piping pressure drop requirements.
5.7.1.3
Discharge block valves shall at minimum be full port and of the same size as the
pressure relief valve discharge.
5.7.1.4
All block valves installed on pressure relief valve inlets or discharges shall be car
sealed open.
5.7.1.5
All safety relief valves equipped with block valves shall have a bypass
connection with the bypass valve throat equal to or greater than the associated
safety relief valve trim size.
5.7.2
Inlet Piping
5.7.2.1
Inlet piping shall be sized so that the total frictional pressure losses between the
protected equipment and the pressure relief valve inlet are less than three percent
of the valve Set Pressure.
5.7.2.2
The pressure drop criteria shall be met using the maximum rated capacity of the
relief valve and not the calculated relief load.
5.7.2.3
Vessel nozzles and inlet piping going to pressure relief valves shall at minimum
be one line size larger than the size of the pressure relief valve inlet flange unless
calculations indicate that the inlet pressure loss requirements can be met.
5.7.2.4
Wherever an inlet block valve is installed, a piping vent valve shall be provided
in the flanged piping spool between the block valve and the pressure relief valve.
5.7.3
Discharge Piping
5.7.3.1
Discharge piping shall not be smaller in diameter than the discharge flange of the
pressure relief valve.
5.7.3.2
Discharge piping to flare shall be free draining with no pockets all the way from
the pressure relief valve to the flare knock-out drum.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 67 of 241
Flare System Design
5.7.3.3
Discharge piping shall be sized to meet the maximum Back Pressure limits of the
relief discharge system (Refer to section 5.8.2.3). The discharge system pressure
drop and the pressure relief valve Back pressure shall be calculated using the
maximum rated capacity of the pressure relief valves, not the calculated relief
load. This requirement is based on ASME Section VIII Pressure Vessel Code
and API RP 521 and is intended to prevent loss of relieving capacity and/or valve
damage as the result of the pressure relief valve rapidly cycling open and closed.
5.7.3.4
Discharge piping from pressure relief valves, as well as discharge system

equipment such as flare knockout drums, shall have a minimum design pressure
of 50 psig. Additionally, where the maximum Back Pressure during relief is
greater than 50 psig, the discharge piping and flare knock-out drum shall be
designed for at least the maximum Back Pressure.
5.7.3.5
Discharge piping from pressure relief valves shall have a design temperature
determined from the temperature of the material being relieved, taking into
account the temperature change across the pressure relief valve and the thermal
effects in the discharge piping. In addition, the discharge piping shall have a
design minimum temperature considering the auto-refrigeration effect to very
low temperatures.
RELIEF DISCHARGE SYSTEM
5.8
5.8.1
Discharge to Atmosphere
5.8.1.1
Where hydrocarbon or other flammable vapor relief to atmosphere is necessary it

shall be per API RP 521. Each pressure relief valve shall have its own separate
tail pipe discharging vertically to atmosphere. The minimum tail pipe exit
velocity shall be such as to achieve a jet momentum dominated exit per Equation
6 of API RP 521 (Third Edition), paragraph 4.3.2.2.
5.8.1.2
Pressure relief valves discharging to atmosphere shall have tail pipes sized to
meet the maximum Back Pressure requirements (Refer to section 5.8.2.3).
5.8.2
Discharge to Flare
5.8.2.1
Pressure relief valves discharging to a flare system or to another closed discharge

system shall have the system piping sized to meet maximum Back Pressure
requirements (Refer to section 5.8.2.3). The discharge system shall be free of
block valves (except those locked open), check valves, control valves, and
equipment which may fail or stop in a closed or restricted position.
5.8.2.2
All flare systems and other closed discharge systems shall be adequate for
separation and handling of any liquid that may be relieved or that may condense.
5.8.2.3
The permissible Back Pressure on relief valves shall meet all of the following
limitations regardless of where the discharge is routed:
a) Conventional Relief Valves
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 68 of 241
Flare System Design

i.
Maximum Superimposed Back Pressure prior to relief

shall not exceed 10% of the Set Pressure
ii.
The Built-Up back Pressure during relief shall not exceed
10% of the Set Pressure
p) Balanced Bellows Relief Valves the maximum Back Pressure
during relief shall not exceed 30-50% of the Set Pressure
q) Pilot Operated Relief Valves the maximum Back Pressure
during relief shall not exceed 30-50% of the Set Pressure.
r) Rupture Disks
i.
ii.
5.8.3
Maximum Superimposed Back Pressure prior to relief

shall not exceed 10% of the Burst Pressure
Maximum Back Pressure during relief shall not cause
subcritical flow unless the rupture disk capacity has been
derated for Back Pressure.
Flare Header Sizing and Design
5.8.3.1
Flares, headers, subheaders, and pressure relief valve discharge laterals shall be
sized so that they collectively meet the maximum Back Pressure limits noted in
Section 5.8.2.3 for each relief case for each pressure relief valve discharging to
flare.
5.8.3.2
Flare system pressure drop calculations are made in a stepwise manner starting at
the flare tip by calculating the pressure drop for each flare system piping segment
of constant diameter and constant flare load.
5.8.3.3
The primary calculation shall be made using the relief case that has the highest
total flare load. This will set the size requirement for the flare, the flare knockout
drum, and the common flare header. The calculation shall determine the Back
Pressure at each pressure relief valve and verify that the Back Pressure limits are
not exceeded. Each pressure relief discharge lateral shall be sized in a similar
manner. The full open pressure relief valve capacity shall be used.
5.8.3.4
All laterals from individual relieving devices should drain to the flare header. All
flare piping shall be sloped a minimum of inch in 10 ft (21 mm in 10 m).
5.8.3.5
All flare system piping shall be designed and tested per B31.3. Isolation of the
piping shall be provided with flanges. Block valves for testing purposes shall be
avoided.
5.8.4
Vapor Depressuring
5.8.4.1
An emergency vapour depressuring system can be employed to prevent metal

temperatures from reaching a level at which stress rupture could occur during a
fire.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 69 of 241
Flare System Design
5.8.4.2
The recommended sizing criteria is to reduce the equipment pressure from initial
conditions to a level equivalent to 50% of the vessels design gauge pressure or
100 psig, whichever is lower, within approximately 15 minutes.
5.8.4.3
The flow capacity of a vapour depressuring valve shall be calculated assuming

100% open. The back pressure in the flare header shall be calculated using the
maximum vapour depressuring rate combined with any other relief valve that
may discharge simultaneously.
5.8.5
Flare Knock-out Drums
5.8.5.1
5.8.6
A minimum design pressure of 50 psig is required for flare knock-out drums.

The vessel should be designed according to the specifications of the ASME code,
although a code stamp is not required if the vessel pressure can never exceed
15 psig based on the back pressure calculations. This is also subject to local
regulations and requirements. A vessel with a design pressure of 50 psig should
not rupture if an explosion occurs.
Flare Stack
5.8.6.1
Although flare stack diameters are sized based on a velocity criteria, the pressure
drop should be checked and the back pressure on the flare knockout drum
calculated. A velocity up to 0.5 Mach for peak, short-term, infrequent flow is
recommended and 0.2 Mach for normal, frequent conditions or continuous
flaring.
5.8.6.2
The flare stack height is based on the radiant heat intensity generated by the
flame. A radiation level of 1500 Btu/hr ft2 should not be exceeded at the base of
the stack.
5.8.6.3
A continuous pilot with a means of remote ignition is recommended for all flares
to ensure ignition of flare gases.
5.8.7
Vent Stack
5.8.8
Vent stacks or the tips of vent stacks are generally sized for an exit velocity of at least
500 ft/s at the maximum relief rate.
5.8.9
Flashback Prevention
5.8.9.1
The continuous use of purge gas is required for all continuous flare stack
installations. The purge gas flow shall be ensured at all times by controlling the
flow and measurement with the provision of a low flow switch and alarm.
5.8.9.2
Flame arrestors shall not be used for continuous flare stack installations. Flame
arrestors are only permitted on non-continuous vent stacks at remote locations
where it is not possible to provide purge gas.
5.8.10 Freeze Protection
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
5.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 70 of 241
Flare System Design
5.8.10.1
The entire flare system shall be prevented from freezing or hydrate formation. If
water wet gas or liquids can enter the flare system, freeze protection with tracing
and insulation shall be provided.
5.8.10.2
A dry gas purge is required if available to sweep the system to the flare stack
after a discharge or due to potential valve leakage.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
6.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 71 of 241
Pipeline Stress Relief
6 . Pipeline Stress Relief

Table of Contents
6.1
6.2
6.3
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 71
PROCESS .................................................................................... 71
HEAT TREATMENT PARAMETERS ........................................... 72
SCOPE
6.1
6.1.1
This specification is for stress relieving of pipelines as described below in 6.1.3.
6.1.2
The stress relieving shall be specified by the purchase order, tender for quote or
Company approved drawing. The stress relieving procedure shall be subject to Company
approval prior to fabrication.
6.1.3
The limitations of these requirements are based on CSA Z662, clause 7.9.16 and the
additional requirements of the Company.
6.1.3.1
Where the effective throat of the items to be welded exceeds 31.8mm (1 ),the
welds shall be stress relieved,
6.1.3.2
Stress relieving of welds may be necessary where the nominal thickness of the
items to be welded is 31.8 mm (1 ) or less if the mechanical properties of the
weld or the residual stress at the weld are unsatisfactory for the intended service
without the use of stress relieving.
6.1.4
It is preferred that all stress relieving be conducted in a controlled environment (i.e.

shop/furnace).
6.1.5
The stress relieving procedures and process shall also meet the requirements of all
Provincial and Territorial regulations where the pipeline is located.
PROCESS
6.2
6.2.1
Stress relieving may be performed either by electric induction method, electric resistance
method or in an approved furnace in case of components.
6.2.2
Exothermic heat treatment and direct flame impingement heating shall not be used for
stress relieving.
6.2.3
For thermal resistance pads, the following selection shall apply:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
6.0
Page
Page 72 of 241

Number of
resistance
pads to be
used
Length of insulation
required
Number of
thermocouples
required
Up to and
including 6
(150mm)
At least one,
centered on
the weld
Minimum of 3 diameters
either side of the weld,
or 18 (450mm),
whichever is the larger
Minimum of two
6 up to and
including 12
At least two,
one either
side of the
weld
or 30 (750mm),
Minimum of two
>12
At least
three. One
centered on
the weld, one
either side of
that
or 36 (800mm),
Minimum of 4
a set of two on
each side of the
weld
Pipeline
Diameter
HEAT TREATMENT PARAMETERS
6.3
6.3.1
A specific heat treatment procedure will be developed at the start of the individual
project.
6.3.2
This procedure will address the following heat treatment parameters: thermocouples for
piping, heating rate and holding time; cooling rate; record of stress relieving and hardness
test.
6.3.3
For Z245.1 carbon steel materials the following procedure shall apply:
6.3.3.1
Numbers of thermocouples 2, shall be located one on top and one on bottom,
6.3.3.2
Heating rate:
6.3.3.2.1
Ambient temperature to 600F (315C) at moderate rate,
6.3.3.2.2
From 600F (315C) to 1150F (621C) at maximum rate of 432F

(222C) per hour,
6.3.3.3
A Soak temperature to be held at 1150F 25F (621C 12C) for 60 minutes

or 15 min per inch thickness, which ever is longer,
6.3.3.4
Cooling rate:
6.3.3.4.1
From 1150F (621C) to 600F (315C) at maximum rate of 432F

(222C ) per hour,
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
6.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 73 of 241
6.3.3.4.2
From 600F (315C) to ambient temperature air cool with insulation

intact,
6.3.3.5
A hardness test is required for 10% of the welds. For P1 steel in service
environments that are not sour, only the weld metal hardness must be measured.
The hardness can be measured with a Brinell hardness tester, a Telebrineller (or
similar hardness tester to ASTM A 833), a portable Pin Brinell tester or a
Microdur tester. Weld metal hardness shall not exceed 200 Brinell
6.3.3.6
A copy of the heat treatment chart and a copy of the heat treatment procedure
signed and dated.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
7.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 74 of 241
Wellsite Stress Relief
7 . Wellsite Stress Relief

Table of Contents
7.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 74
SCOPE
7.1
7.1.1
General Specifications for ASME B31.3 Stress Relief or other information if required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 75 of 241
Sour Service Piping
8 . Sour Service Piping

Table of Contents
8.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................
8.2
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS ........................................................
8.3
DEFINITION OF SOUR SERVICE ...............................................
8.4
PIPE ............................................................................................
8.5
FITTINGS & FLANGES ...............................................................
8.6
NOTCH TOUGHNESS ..................................................................
8.7
IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................
8.8
CERTIFICATION ........................................................................
8.9
VALVES ......................................................................................
8.10 BOLTING ....................................................................................
8.11 GASKETS ....................................................................................
8.12 CARBON/LOW ALLOY STEELS-SOUR SERVICE PIPING
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................
8.13 AFFIDAVITS ...............................................................................
75
75
75
77
77
78
79
79
79
79
79
79
81
SCOPE
8.1
8.1.1
This supplement shall be used for CNRL Sour Service piping systems
8.1.2
Any deviation from stated requirements require written approval from the Company
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
8.2
8.2.1
Latest revision of NACE MR0175/ISO15156 Parts 1, 2 and 3, including all published

technical corrigenda (NACE). CNRL has historically followed all previous versions of
the NACE standard and will therefore as a matter of due diligence and sound engineering
practice continue to conform to the requirements of the latest standard.
8.2.2
Latest revision of NACE TM0177, Laboratory Testing of Metals for Resistance to

Sulfide Stress Cracking and Stress Corrosion Cracking in H2S Environments (TM0177).
DEFINITION OF SOUR SERVICE
8.3
8.3.1
For carbon and low alloy steels, sour service is defined as when the hydrogen sulfide
(H2S) exceeds 0.30 kPa (0.05psi). Partial pressure is calculated as follows:
8.3.2
Mole fraction H2S (mole % H2S / 100) x total system pressure = H2S partial pressure
8.3.3
Examples:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 76 of 241
Sour Service Piping
8.3.3.1
The mole fraction equivalent to 2.5% H2S is 0.025. If the maximum system
pressure is 1000 kPa, then the H2S partial pressure is 0.025 x 1000 = 25 kPa.
8.3.3.2
The mole fraction equivalent to 50 ppm is 50 x 10-6 or 0.00050. If the maximum

pressure is 1000 kPa, then the H2S partial pressure is:
0.00050 x 1000 = 0.05 kPa.
8.3.4
The following chart provides guidance on determining whether or not the application is
considered sour service.
Determination of Sour Service for Carbon Steel
Total System Pressure (kPa)
10000
Sulfide Stress Cracking Region

1000
100
0.001
0.01
0.1
Mole % H2S
8.3.5
For Corrosion Resistant Alloys (CRAs), including stainless steels, Monel, etc., any level
of H2S is considered sour and the tables within Part 3 of the NACE document shall be
followed.
8.3.6
The following environments are not considered sour service according to NACE:
8.3.7
Crude Oil Storage and Handling Facilities
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Page
Page 77 of 241
Sour Service Piping
8.3.8
Operating at total absolute pressure below 0.45 MPa (65 psia)
Water Handling Facilities
Operating at total absolute pressure below 0.45 MPa (65 psia)
PIPE
8.4
8.4.1
Carbon steel materials used in sour gas or oil service shall be selected from the following
table:
ISO specifications and

grades
Other designations
ISO 3183-3 grades: L245 through L450
8.4.2
CSA Grades 290, 359 and 386

(Tensile strength shall not exceed 625
MPa)
ASTM A 106 grades A, B and C
ASTM A 333 grades 1 and 6
ASTM 524 grades 1 and 2
ASTM A 381 class 1, Y35 to Y65
ASTM A 53
The piping material shall have the following chemical properties:
8.4.2.1
The ratio of percent Manganese to percent Carbon

(% Mn / % C) shall be greater than or equal to 2.5.
8.4.2.2
The Carbon Equivalent (CE) shall be a maximum of 0.45, calculated using the
following equation:
CE = %C + %Mn + (%Ni + % Cu) + (%Cr + %Mo + %V)
6
15
These requirements apply to both ladle and check analysis.

The macro-hardness at any location in the pipe shall not exceed 22HRC (or
equivalent value as per ASTM E-140). The micro-hardness at any location in the
weld zone, deposited weld metal or heat-affected zone (HAZ) shall not exceed 250
HV 500 gf.
8.4.3
All Corrosion Resistant Alloys (CRA) and other alloys used in sour gas or oil service
shall be appropriately selected using NACE.
FITTINGS & FLANGES
8.5
8.5.1
Carbon Steel Fittings
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 78 of 241
Sour Service Piping
8.5.1.1
All butt weld fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME SA-234
Grade WPB or ASME SA 420 Grade WPL6.
8.5.1.2
All forged socket weld or threaded fittings and weldolets shall be manufactured
in accordance with ASTM A-105 or ASTM A-350 Grade LF2
8.5.1.3
Fittings shall be preferably hot formed. If cold formed, they shall be:
9
Thermally stressed relieved, minimum temperature shall be
595 C (1100 F)
9
The final maximum hardness shall be 22 HRC except for
pipe fittings made from ASTM A-234 grade WPB or WPC
for which the final hardness shall not exceed 197 HBW.
8.5.1.4
Pipe fittings of ASTM A-53 Grade B, ASTM A-106 Grade B, CSA Grade 290,
ISO 3183 L290, or lower yield strength grades with similar chemical
compositions are acceptable with cold strain equivalent to 15% or less, provided
the hardness in the strained area does not exceed 190 HBW.
8.5.1.5
Carbon steel flange materials shall be ASTM A-105 or ASTM A-350 Grade LF2
8.5.1.6
Use of CRA fittings and flanges shall be the requirements of NACE.
NOTCH TOUGHNESS
8.6
8.6.1
Materials used in low temperature sour service shall exhibit impact ductility and meet the
notch toughness criteria set out below at the specified temperature 25C (40F) below the
minimum design temperature.
8.6.2
Unless otherwise specified, carbon steel material with specified minimum strength over
448 MPa (65 ksi) up to 517 MPa (75 ksi) shall possess the impact values as described in
Fig. UG-84.1 of ASME VIII Div I. For piping material the values must meet the
requirements of table 323.2.3 of ASME B.31.3.
8.6.2.1
Specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance with ASTM E-23. The
frequency of impact testing shall be as established in ASME SA-370.
8.6.2.2
The maximum size test specimen obtainable shall always be used. Where full
size specimens cannot be obtained and sub-size specimens are used, the energy
values may be reduced in accordance with ASME SA370.
8.6.2.3
The Contractor shall provide substantiating Manufacturers data (e.g., transition

curves) to show that the given material meets the required values.
8.6.3
For low alloy steels the Nil Ductility Temperature shall be at or below the minimum
design metal temperature. Impact values shall meet the UG 84 or Table 323.3.5
requirements as applicable.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 79 of 241
Sour Service Piping
IDENTIFICATION
8.7
8.7.1
Flanges shall be fully identified in a permanent manner as is specified in ASME A-105

and A 350.
CERTIFICATION
8.8
The Contractor shall provide the Manufacturers certification that flanges, fittings and
pipe are made to the requirements specified in the ASTM or ASME standards, including
the heat treatment procedure and the results of physical and chemical tests conducted.
VALVES
8.9
8.9.1
All valves for sour gas or sour liquid service shall meet the material requirements of
NACE.
8.9.2
Valves made from carbon steels and low alloy steels shall comply with the applicable
requirements of sections 4.0 and 5.0.
8.10
BOLTING
8.10.1 ASTM A-193 Grade B7M stud bolts or equal and ASTM A-194 Grade 2HM hexagonal
nuts or equal shall be used on all sour gas and liquid service.
8.10.2 For low temperature sour service ASTM A 320 Grade L7M stud bolts and ASTM A 194
Grade 7M hexagonal nuts shall be used.
8.10.3 All stud bolts and hexagonal nuts used in sour service shall have distinct permanent
identification.
8.10.4 Bolt tightening shall be by torque wrench or other approved method which will ensure
closure without cold working of bolts. Impact tightening shall not be allowed unless
specifically approved by the Company.
8.11
GASKETS
8.11.1 All gaskets in sour service shall be graphite material, spirotallic construction, and 3.2mm
/ 0.125 thick.
8.12
CARBON/LOW ALLOY STEELS-SOUR SERVICE PIPING

INSTALLATION
8.12.1 A minimum corrosion allowance of 3.2 mm (0.125) shall be added to the calculated
minimum allowable wall thickness of all pipe and fittings.
8.12.2 No threaded connections shall be permitted in sour gas process piping, except for
secondary lines such as temperature/pressure indicators or instrument leads downstream
of flanged block valves connected by weld fittings to primary lines.
8.12.3 All butt welds and fillet welds in sour service piping systems shall be 100% stress
relieved. Stress relieving may be waived if the following are met:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 80 of 241
Sour Service Piping
The weld procedure produces a weld metal hardness equal to or less than 250
HV (Sec. 12.4)
The overall thickness of the joint is less than (19 mm)
There is prior written approval from Facilities Engineering or the Chief

Inspector
8.12.4 All butt welds in sour service shall be subjected to 100 % radiography.
8.12.5 For welding on in-service piping that has been exposed to a sour environment, wetfluorescent magnetic particle testing (WFMT) of 100% of the completed weld shall be
performed 24 hours after completion of the weld.
8.12.6 All socket welds shall be 100% inspected using MPI. Radiography shall be used on 5%
of socket welds to ensure the proper root gap is present.
8.12.7 The hardness of the weld, heat affected zone and parent metal for all sour service (piping)
shall meet the following requirements of NACE:
Hardness test methods
Vickers HV 10 or HV 5
Or
Rockwell HRC
Rockwell HRC
Hardness test locations for

welding procedure qualification
Weld root:
Base metal, HAZ and weld root
metal. Refer to NACE part 2,
7.3.3.3 Figure 2, 3 or 4.
Base metal and HAZ for weld
overlays. Refer to NACE part 2,
7.3.3.3 Figure 6.
Weld cap:
Base metal, HAZ and weld metal
of unexposed weld cap. Refer to
NACE part 2, 7.3.3.3 Figure 2 or
4.
Base Metal and HAZ for weld
overlays. Refer to NACE part 2,
7.3.3.3 Figure 5
Maximum
acceptable
hardness
250 HV
22 HRC
250 HV
22 HRC
250 HV
22 HRC
22 HRC
8.12.8 Welding Procedure Specifications shall have documented PQRs that provide
microhardness test results as per NACE.
8.12.9 Stress relieving, radiographic inspection and hardness tests records shall be supplied to
the Company as part of the Contractors quality assurance documentation.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
8.0
8.13
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 81 of 241
Sour Service Piping
AFFIDAVITS
8.13.1 Affidavits showing conformance to specifications contained in this supplement shall be

provided by the Contractor for all pipe, valves, fittings, bolts, nuts and other materials
supplied for sour service.
8.13.2 Confirmation of conformance to the required material specifications shall be provided for
all piping components in the form of Mill Test Reports for all materials used. The
original copy of the Provincial or Territorial inspection and Canadian registration
certificate showing conformance to the required material specifications shall be provided
to the Company.
8.13.3 Affidavits of stress relieving, non-destructive inspection, hardness tests and chemical
composition shall be supplied to the Company.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
9.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 82 of 241
Sour Service Wellsite Facilities
9 . Sour Service Wellsite Facilities

Table of Contents
9.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 82
SCOPE
9.1
9.1.1
This specification has been eliminated. Please use the previous section, 8.0. Sour
Service Supplement for Piping Systems for information on sour piping.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
10.0
10.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 83 of 241
Hydrogen Degassing
Hydrogen Degassing
Table of Contents
10.1
10.2
10.3
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 83
BAKE OUT PROCEDURE ............................................................ 83
SUMMARY .................................................................................. 84
10.1
SCOPE
10.1.1 A Bake Out is required for all tie-ins to existing sour systems. The bake out procedure
below is limited to P1 low carbon (<0.45 CE) steel materials only.
10.1.2 Comment: This applies to CSA Grade 290, Grade 359, and Grade 414 ASTM A-106-B,
A-234-WPB, A-105, A-333 Grade 6, A-420 WPL6, A-350 LF2 and other low carbon P1
steels. For medium or high carbon steels, low alloy & alloy steels consult the Integrity
Group.
10.1.3 Bake outs can be performed by two methods; stress relievers (induction coil) and liquid
propane torch. Stress relievers are the preferred method and should be used whenever
possible.
10.1.4 Where the consequence and risk of a failure is high (i.e. safety of in-plant personnel) the
use of stress relievers are strongly recommended.
10.2
BAKE OUT PROCEDURE
10.2.1 Clean metal to white, 150 mm (6") back from area to be welded, on each side of weld.
10.2.2 Conduct MPI inspection of the cleaned area to ensure there are no surface cracks.
10.2.3 Clean and degrease surface.
10.2.4 Conduct bake out using an induction coil or a propane torch. The bake out temperature
shall be measured on the bottom of the line using a Tempil stick, pyrometer or
thermocouple.
10.2.5 Heat up the pipe slowly from ambient to 450 C (842 F). This heating cycle should take at
least one (1) hour to heat up the area. The bake out temperature should be maintained for
a minimum distance of 75 mm (3) back from the weld bevel. The bake out temperature
shall not exceed 650C (1202 F). If the temperature exceeds 650 C (1202 F), that section
including at least 300 mm in either direction shall be removed.
10.2.6 Hold at temperature for one (1) hour.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
10.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 84 of 241
Hydrogen Degassing
Note: requires one hour to ensure hydrogen migrates out of the weld area to
prevent delayed hydrogen cracking.
10.2.7 Cool down to preheat temperature. Insulation is recommended for a controlled cooling
rate. The insulation blanket should be wrapped completely around the pipe and the
temperature should be measured on the bottom of the pipe. This cooling cycle should
take at least one (1) hour. Don't go below the welding preheat temperature and be
prepared to weld as soon the weld preheat temperature is reached.
10.2.8 Comment: Hydrogen will have a tendency to migrate back into the area if the weld area
is cooled below the preheat temperature.
10.2.9 MPI (using black on white contrast) 12 hours after completion of welding.
10.3
SUMMARY
10.3.1 The purpose of a bake out is to reduce the hydrogen that accumulates in steel in sour
service. This hydrogen can result in hydrogen cold cracking of the weld. This type of
cracking may occur up to 48 hours after the weld has been completed. The temperature
must not exceed 650 C to prevent heating into the lower critical region. Above 723 C the
metallurgical properties of the steel will be changed resulting in changes to the
mechanical properties.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
11.0
11.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 85 of 241
Hot Tapping Pipelines

Table of Contents
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
SCOPE ........................................................................................
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS ....................................................
PRE-REQUISITES FOR HOT TAPPING ......................................
WELDING ...................................................................................
NON-DESTRUCTIVE AND PRESSURE TESTING ........................
TAPPING ....................................................................................
TYPICAL HOT TAP WORK PLAN...............................................
11.1
85
86
86
87
87
87
88
SCOPE
11.1.1 This standard addresses the minimum requirements to be met prior to and during hot
tapping on any pipeline belonging to or operated by CNR.
11.1.2 Primary safety aspects are addressed in this Specification refer also to the relevant
Inspectors Safety Checklist supplied in the Safety Manual. Technical details may vary
from job to job. This emphasizes the need for a written job plan, reviewed and approved
by the pipeline technologist/engineer and Chief Inspector prior to the start of work.
11.1.3 This hot tapping specification applies only to hot taps on pipelines fabricated from carbon
steels. For hot tapping of Process Piping, see 8.07-1 of General Specs, and for hot
tapping of tanks see section 12.0 of this manual.
11.1.4 All hot taps must be individually approved by the Pipeline Engineer/Technologist and the
Chief Inspector.
11.1.5 Hot tapping may be done only under the following dimensional conditions:
Service
Branch diameter if
stubbed directly**
2/3 Dm
2/3 Dm
Branch diameter if an
Olet is used **
2/3 Dm
2/3 Dm
Non-flammable (air, water)

Flammable fluid, including
emulsion
Flammable gas or vapor
2/3 Dm
2/3 Dm
Sour service (gas or liquid)*
2/3Dm
2/3 Dm
Dm = Diameter of main run being tapped into.
* Note: The special restrictions applicable to sour service hot taps
** Note: With written approval from the Chief Inspector, the branch size may be
sized up to of the main line.
11.1.6 All hot tap branch openings shall be reinforced by a purchased and certified fullencirclement sleeve reinforcement. Procured and/or fabricated saddle-type reinforcement
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
11.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 86 of 241
is not acceptable. The reinforcement shall be certified to the full MOP of the pipeline
being tapped into (the main run).
11.2
11.3
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
a)
API 2201 and the references listed in paragraph 1.2 of API 2201 are referenced.
s)
CSA Z-662
t)
ASME Section V
u)
ASME Section IX
v)
Jurisdictional regulations.
PRE-REQUISITES FOR HOT TAPPING
11.3.1 The actual welding should be done only at or below the pressure as stipulated in the
approved hot tap procedures.
11.3.2 The flow in the line must be sufficient to provide for adequate heat dissipation, and
within the limits contained in the pre-approved hot tap procedure.
11.3.3 The location where the hot tap is to be done must be proven to be in the non-corroded
condition.
11.3.3.1
UT Scanning in an area that is minimum 75mm (3) greater in diameter than the
opening is required. UT Scan shall verify the absence of lamination and general
conditions of the material to be welded.
11.3.3.2
For pipelines in sour service, the weld area as defined above shall be tested for
linear surface indications by contrast MPI prior to start of welding.
11.3.3.3
Corrosion exceeding the corrosion allowance of the original design, or 12.5% of

the original NOMINAL thickness shall be considered excessive for hot tapping
or welding. If wall thinning is this magnitude is found, either a different location
must be selected, or the situation must be reviewed by engineering again.
11.3.4 Hot taps may not be located on or within 2x wall thickness or 25mm (1 - whichever is
the larger) from a longitudinal weld on pipelines.
11.3.5 Hot taps may not be placed on the circumferential weld of a pipeline, and shall be located
sufficiently far upstream of valves and/or instrumentation to avoid affecting the operation
of the valve or instrument. Hot taps may not be located closer than 3 from a
circumferential pipeline weld.
11.3.6 An engineering assessment shall be done and records kept. The assessment shall
consider, among other things, the following;
9
Reinforcement required a reinforcement sleeve adequate for the MOP
of the main run shall be provided in all instances
9
Maximum pressure to be maintained during the welding operation
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
11.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 87 of 241

9
9
Minimum/maximum flow rate to be maintained during the welding

operation
Any other safety procedure.
11.3.7 A written work procedure shall be established and all involved shall be familiar with it.
11.4
WELDING
11.4.1 The contractor shall identify the pre-approved hot tap welding procedure (WPS) to the
company prior to start of work.
11.4.2 The welder shall be qualified to the WPS, and shall be certified as a pressure welder in
the Province or Territory of the installation. (Alberta B pressure ticket, BC and SK
pressure ticket, NWT and Yukon Alberta B pressure ticket).
11.4.3 The contractor shall have a hot tap welding procedure certified to CSA Z662, preapproved by the Chief Inspector.
11.4.4 Low hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
11.5
NON-DESTRUCTIVE AND PRESSURE TESTING
11.5.1 The stub-to-main run weld shall be inspected by contrast MPI prior to installation of the
reinforcement sleeve, and the reinforcement sleeve welds, once completed, shall also be
subjected to MPI.
11.5.2 Prior to tapping, the setup shall be left undisturbed for no less than 48 hours (regardless
of whether the main line is in sweet or sour service) and contrast MPI repeated.
11.5.3 The stubbed on branch weld shall be visually inspected internally and externally for
100% of its circumference. Suitable remote inspection tools (boroscope, videoscope)
shall be used, and if not available, consideration shall be given to using pup stub
attachments to facilitate visual inspection.
11.5.4 The stub attachment shall be pressure tested at the test pressure of the piping system or
pipeline after the reinforcement sleeve is attached and welded. The test pressure shall be
the test pressure of the main run or the lateral, whichever is the higher.
11.5.5 The pressure test shall be controlled with no less than 2 pressure indicators, and certified
by the contractor. The pressure test shall be of one hour duration.
11.6
TAPPING
11.6.1 There are several different tapping machines on the market. CNR does not prescribe what
type of machine is to be used, whoever the following restrictions apply:
9
The machine shall be driven by an energy source other than electricity or
internal combustion
9
The weight of the machine shall be supported independently from the
piping being hot tapped no additional stress may be placed on the
piping due to the weight of the machine
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
11.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 88 of 241

9
The machine and all its components shall be rated for the same pressure
and temperature as the piping system being hot tapped
11.6.2 The hot tap into a pipeline must be made by cutting a plug out of the main run. The plug
shall be extracted, identified as to its location and job/project number, and retained by the
Contractor, to be submitted to the Company with the QC documentation.
11.7
TYPICAL HOT TAP WORK PLAN
11.7.1 This work plan is provided as an example. For the work in hand a separate, specific work
plan has to be developed and documented. The work plan should remain in the work
order file as part of the QC package.
11.7.2 See the next page foe Sequence, Activity, Responsibility tracking sheet for verification of
work.
Sequence Activity
Responsibility
Verification
(initials
and date)
1
Engineering review
Facilities engineer
or delegate
2
Ultrasonic scan of weld area
Contractor
2a
MPI of weld area
Contractor
3
Pre-preparation of hot tap assembly Contractor
(this may include pressure testing
any spools that may be involved)
4
Clean and prepare surface for Contractor
welding
5
Reduce pressure (if/as required)
Operations
6
Tack and weld stub/olet to main run
Contractor
7
Perform NDE as required (MPI/ Contractor
Shear Wave UT) on hot tap
8
Wait 48 hours for MPI abd Shear Contractor
wave UT inspection
9
Pressure test one hour
Contractor
10
Tap into live line
Contractor
11
Extract plug and seal off new branch Contractor
with provided valve
12
Unless immediately connected, a Contractor
blind must be provided into the open
end of the valve to prevent leaks
because of possible weeping.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
12.0
12.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 89 of 241
Hot Tapping Tanks
Hot Tapping Tanks

Table of Contents
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
SCOPE ........................................................................................
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS ....................................................
PRE-REQUISITES FOR HOT TAPPING ......................................
SOUR SERVICE CONSIDERATIONS ...........................................
WELDING ...................................................................................
NDE AND PRESSURE TESTING ..................................................
TAPPING ....................................................................................
TYPICAL HOT TAP WORK PLAN...............................................
12.1
89
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
SCOPE
12.1.1 This standard addresses the minimum requirements to be met prior to and during hot
tapping on aboveground storage tanks at any facility belonging to or operated by CNR.
Note that ALL welding on in-service aboveground tanks, whether associated with actual
tapping or not, shall be done in accordance with the principles outlined herein.
12.1.2 Hot tapping is NOT ALLOWED on underground storage tanks.
12.1.3 Primary safety aspects are addressed in the Inspectors Safety Checklist in the Safety
manual. Technical details may vary from job to job.
12.1.4 Typical hot taps are to be pre-approved by the facilities engineer and Chief Inspector.
Hot taps conforming to these typicals may be conducted as per the pre-approved
procedures. Situations that do not conform to the pre-approved typical hot taps must be
individually approved prior to the start of work.
12.1.5 This hot tapping specification applies only to hot taps on aboveground storage tanks.
For hot tapping on process piping see Specification 8.07-A of General Specs and for hot
tapping on pipelines see Specification 11.0 of this manual.
12.1.6 Hot tapping of nozzles > 150mm (6)NPS on aboveground storage tanks is strongly
discouraged, and requires specific approval from the Chief Inspector.
12.1.7 All hot tapped nozzles > 55mm (2) NPS require reinforcement plates designed as per
API650 Table 3-6, duplicated below.
12.1.8 Hot tapping on shell plates > thick requires engineering approval.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
12.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Hot Tapping Tanks
Page 90 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
12.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 91 of 241
Hot Tapping Tanks
12.1.9 Nozzles shall be of A106B seamless pipe, with A333 Gr 6 an acceptable alternative.
Nozzles shall be schedule 80. Reinforcement plate shall be A516-70. Reinforcement
plate thickness shall be the same as the shell thickness or 6.4mm (), whichever is the
smaller.
12.1.10 Threaded nozzles shall be minimum of sched 80, and a maximum diameter of 100mm (4
NPS). Internally threaded nozzles shall not be threaded all the way through, leaving a
minimum of 25mm (1) of sound material at the weld end. Externally threaded nozzles
shall have a minimum of 37mm (1.5) of sound material at the weld end 50mm (2) if a
repad is top be installed. Installation of threaded nozzles shall otherwise be as detailed
for flanged nozzles, including all NDE, testing and approvals.
12.1.11 Flanges shall be ASME Class 150 RF. Slip-on flanges of Class 150 may be substituted
with approval from Facilities Engineering.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
12.0
12.2
12.3
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 92 of 241
Hot Tapping Tanks
REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
a)
API 2201 and the references listed in paragraph 1.2 of API 2201 are referenced.
w)
API 653
x)
ASME Section V
y)
ASME Section IX
z)
Jurisdictional Guidelines (Saskatchewan SE-01 only).
PRE-REQUISITES FOR HOT TAPPING

12.3.1.1
The actual welding shall be done only with the tank static (i.e. no filling or
emptying operations during the hot tap process) and with the liquid level at least
90cm (3ft.) above the point of hot tapping.
12.3.1.2
Hot tapping on tank roofs is thus prohibited.
12.3.1.3
The location where the hot tap is to be done must be proven to be in the noncorroded condition.
12.3.1.4
UT scanning is required for an area that is minimum 75mm (3) greater in

diameter than the extent of the reinforcement pad welding will be. UT Scan shall
verify the absence of lamination and determine the general condition of the
material to be welded. The minimum wall thickness shall be the nominal tank
shell thickness less corrosion allowance (use 1/16 if unknown), or 3/16 of an
inch, whichever is greater.
12.3.1.5
Hot taps may not be placed through existing vertical or horizontal welds. The
minimum distance between an existing horizontal weld or existing nozzle repad
and the hot tap repad-to-shell weld shall be 75mm (3) measured toe-to-toe. The
minimum distance between a vertical weld and a hot tap repad-to-shell weld shall
be 300mm (12).
12.3.1.6
Hot tap repads may NOT cover existing welds.
12.3.1.7
An engineering assessment shall be done on typical hot tap installations and

records kept. The assessment shall consider, among other things, the following;
9 Reinforcement required (if>2)
9 Fluid level to be maintained
9 Lock-out of tank fill- and discharge piping
9 Any other safety procedure.
12.3.1.8
Any hot tap that falls outside the scope of a pre-approved typical installation
shall be individually approved by facilities engineering and the Chief Inspector.
12.3.1.9
A written work procedure shall be established and all involved shall be familiar
with it.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
12.0
12.4
Page
Page 93 of 241
Hot Tapping Tanks
SOUR SERVICE CONSIDERATIONS
12.4.1 Hot taps on tanks that have been exposed to free sulfur bearing process streams or sour
service of a level that requires a vapour recovery system shall be subject of individual
approvals as noted in 3.3.5.
12.4.2 In that case, the area where the tap is to be made shall be inspected as detailed in this
specification, and then shall require the weld area to undergo a Bake Out procedure of
80C for 1 hour duration.
12.4.3 The area shall be wirebrushed clean before welding.
12.4.4 Once the stub is welded on, the weld shall be visually inspected inside and out.
12.5
WELDING
12.5.1 The contractor shall submit a registered (ABSA or Boilers Branch stamped) hot tap
welding procedure (WPS) for company approval.
12.5.2 The welder shall be qualified to weld on pressure equipment in the Province or Territory
of the installation.
12.6
NDE AND PRESSURE TESTING
12.6.1 The stubbed on branch shall be pressure tested at 15 psi before the tap is made.
12.6.2 Two calibrated pressure indicators shall be used, and the medium shall NOT be air or
gas. Water or water with a freeze-point suppressant shall be used.
12.6.3 The test pressure shall be held for one hour as per CNR procedures.
12.6.4 Flanged connection butt welds shall be radiographed.
12.6.5 The external branch weld shall be visually inspected. Visually inspect the root weld on
the branch inside diameter and welds on reinforcing plate.
12.7
TAPPING
12.7.1 There are several different tapping machines on the market. CNR does not prescribe what
type of machine is to be used.
12.7.2 The hot tap machine shall be independently supported, and no stress shall be placed on
the tank during the hot tap process.
12.7.3 The hot tap into a tank should preferably be made by cutting a plug out of the tank shell,
but simple drilling out of the tap is acceptable for taps of 50mm (2) NPS.
12.8
TYPICAL HOT TAP WORK PLAN
12.8.1 This work plan is provided as an example for typical hot tap. For the work in hand a
separate, specific work plan has to be developed and documented. The work plan should
remain in the work order file as part of the QC package.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
12.0
Sequence
Activity
Engineering review
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 94 of 241
Hot Tapping Tanks

Responsibility
Facilities engineer or
delegate
Ultrasonic scan of weld area
Contractor
Pre-preparation of hot tap Contractor
assembly (this may include
pressure testing any spools that
may be involved)
Clean and prepare surface for Contractor
welding
Tack and weld stub/olet to main Contractor
run
Perform inspection as required
Contractor
Hydraulically Pressure test stub Contractor
piece
Tap into tank
Contractor
Extract plug and seal off new Contractor
branch with provided valve
Unless immediately connected, a Contractor
blind must be provided into the
open end of the valve to prevent
leaks because of possible
weeping.
Verification (initials and

date)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
13.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 95 of 241
Non Metallic Materials

Table of Contents
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
13.15
13.16
13.17
13.18
13.19
13.20
13.21
13.22
13.23
13.24
13.25
13.26
13.1
SCOPE ........................................................................................ 95
GENERAL ................................................................................... 95
LEGISLATION, REGULATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS ...... 96
THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINES ................................................... 96
THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINE MATERIAL SELECTION TABLE 96
SERVICE LIMITATIONS ............................................................ 98
INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 98
JOINING ..................................................................................... 99
COLD WEATHER JOINING OF POLYETHYLENE PIPE ............. 99
GENERIC BUTT FUSION PROCEDURE .................................... 101
INSPECTION ............................................................................. 102
PRESSURE TESTING- SEE PRESSURE TESTING SECTION 14 103
REPAIR OF THERMOPLASTICS .............................................. 103
THERMOSET PIPELINES (FIBERGLASS COMPOSITES) ......... 103
SERVICE LIMITATIONS .......................................................... 103
INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 103
JOINING ................................................................................... 104
PRESSURE TESTING ................................................................ 105
REPAIRS ................................................................................... 105
CEMENT LINED PIPE ............................................................... 105
ZAPLOCK PIPE ........................................................................ 105
FIBERSPAR PIPE ...................................................................... 105
TITE LINER HDPE PIPE ........................................................ 106
TUBOSCOPE TK99 AND TK69 .................................................. 106
FLEX PIPE ................................................................................ 106
FLEX STEEL ............................................................................. 106
SCOPE
13.1.1 This specification shall apply to non metallic pipelines installed between facilities.
13.2
GENERAL
13.2.1 All work shall comply with the legislative and regulatory requirements of the province or
territory of installation.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 96 of 241
13.2.2 In the event of a conflict between this specification and any other governing legislation,
regulation, code or standard the Company must be consulted and the specification
clarified or amended before any work is done.
13.3
LEGISLATION, REGULATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
13.3.1 All piping systems and elements of such systems and the assembly, installation and
testing of such elements and systems shall, where applicable, be equal to or exceed the
minimum requirements as specified in the latest revision of the following codes and
regulations:
9
CSA Z662, specifically section 13.
9
All provincial regulatory bodies
13.3.2 Where two or more codes, standards or regulations apply, the more stringent shall be
used in the design, fabrication and testing of pipeline systems unless otherwise approved
in writing by the Company.
13.3.3 All piping elements such as pipes, flanges, fittings and other pressure containing
components and accessories shall be properly marked
13.4
THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINES
13.4.1 Thermoplastic is defined as plastic resin that is shaped by heat and is susceptible to
deformation with increasing temperatures. Many types of thermoplastic material exist for
natural gas, water or other substances, and the correct material shall be selected. See
table below for guidance.
13.4.2 Polyethylene is the most common application of thermoplastic resins used in Canadian
Naturals system.
13.5
THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINE MATERIAL SELECTION TABLE
13.5.1 The following table provides guidelines for the type of thermoplastic material(s) that may
be used in various applications. This table should not be taken as a defining authority on
what type of thermoplastic material to use but rather as a starting point. To determine if a
particular material is appropriate for the specific application in question, contact the
manufacturer for more details.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
13.0
Page 97 of 241
Service
Suggested
Materials
Natural Gas
(sweet)
or
Less than 5% H2S
or
20 Kpa partial
pressure
Polyethylene (PE)
Polybutylene
(PB)
Polypropylene
(PP)
Operating Temperature
Limits
NonPressure
Pressure*
71C (160F) 60C
(140F)
99C (210F)
90C (194F)
Natural Gas (sour)
Not suitable
Produced Water
Polyethylene (PE)
71C (160F)
Polybutylene
(PB)
Polyproylene (PP)
99C (210F)
Polyethylene (PE)
71C (160F)
Potable Water
Page
Other Comments
Per CSA Z662, service

temperatures shall not
exceed 60C (140F).
Per CSA Z662,
material shall be a PE
3608, 3708, 3710 or
4710 resin.
82C
(180F)
Not
generally
used
Per AR 91/2005,
paragraph 11,
polymeric pipe shall
not be used for natural
gas containing more
than 10 mol/km H2S.
90C (194F)
60C
(140F)
82C
(180F)
Not
generally
used
60C
(140F)
82C
(180F)
54C
(130F)
82C
(130F)
71C
(160F)
Polybutylene
99C (210F)
(PB)
Polyvinyl
65C (150F)
chloride (PVC)
Polyvinyl
99C (210F)
chloride (CPVC)
Acrylonitrile82C (180F)
butadiene-styrene
(ABS)
*Non-pressure service is defined as service at atmospheric pressure.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
13.5.1.1
13.6
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 98 of 241
Note: The design pressure for polyethylene pipe must address service fluid
and temperature limitations as per the requirements of CSA Z662 07 section 13.
SERVICE LIMITATIONS
13.6.1 Thermoplastic pipeline shall not be used for conveying natural gas with greater than 10
mol/km hydrogen sulfide content.
13.6.2 Polyethylene pipe shall not be used for high-vapour-pressure (HVP) liquid pipelines, nor
shall it be used at temperatures greater than 60C (140F).
13.6.3 Polyethylene pipe shall not be used in muskeg.
13.6.4 The manufacturer of the thermoplastic piping being used may have other service
limitations for the material. Review any documentation to ensure the material application
is correct
13.7
INSTALLATION
13.7.1 Any new polymeric material used for pipeline construction or repair must be submitted to
the appropriate regulator with sufficient technical information about the material.
Canadian Natural must be in possession of the regulator approval before starting
construction.
13.7.2 Heat fusion joining inspection shall be carried out as outlined in CSA Z662-07, clause
13.3.6 .
13.7.3 Pipe shall not be bent to radii smaller than that recommended by the manufacturer during
installation. No field-fabricated mitre bends are permitted.
13.7.4 Thermoplastic pipelines shall have a depth of cover the same as steel pipelines.
13.7.5 Prior to emerging from the ditch, thermoplastic pipelines must transition to steel below
grade. The steel/thermoplastic joint must be detailed in the design of the pipeline.
13.7.6 If, due to exceptional circumstances, approval is granted by Canadian Natural to bring
thermoplastic pipelines above grade, the rise and aboveground pipeline segment shall be
protected from inadvertent damage by driving steel pilings not further than 1.5 m (5 ft)
from the aboveground pipeline segment in such a way that vehicular and
pedestrian/animal traffic is prevented from approaching the pipeline.
13.7.7 When approval is granted by Canadian Natural to bring thermoplastic pipelines above
grade, aboveground piping must be protected from ambient weather conditions and
ultraviolet degradation.
13.7.8 An electrically conductive metallic marker (minimum 14 gauge marker wire) must be
installed in the ditch beside or above the pipeline as a tracer for future locating of the
pipeline.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 99 of 241
13.7.9 The manufacturer of the thermoplastic piping being used will have more detailed
installation instructions for the material. Review any documentation to ensure that proper
installation procedures are carried out. Note any installation temperature requirements.
13.8
JOINING
13.8.1 The following table details acceptable joining methods for the thermoplastic materials in
Section 4.0 Thermoplastic Pipeline Material Selection Table. (Table data from Table
D1.8, Piping Handbook 7th Edition, M.L. Nayyar, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2000.)
Joining Method
PE PVC CPVC PP PB ABS
Solvent cementing
X
X
X
Heat fusion
X
X
X
Threading
X
X
X
X
X
Flanged connectors X
X
X
X
X
X
Grooved joints
X
X
X
X
X
Mechanical
X
X
X
X
X
X
compression
Elastomeric seal
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flaring
X
X
X
13.8.2 For all piping materials, obtain information on the proper joining procedures from the
pipe manufacturer. The joining procedures shall be documented and tested by the
installation contractor prior to the start of work.
13.8.3 The installation contractor is responsible for ensuring that personnel performing the
joining procedures have been trained and tested in those procedures by the pipe
manufacturer, the manufacturers representative or the pipe installer.
13.8.4 For Polyethylene piping:
13.9
13.8.4.1
Heat fusion and/or special fittings or flanges shall be used to join polyethylene
pipe and fittings. Manufacturer-approved transition fittings or flanges shall be
used to join polyethylene pipe to steel pipe.
13.8.4.2
Heat fusion joints must have a minimum tensile strength within 5% of the
adjoining parent pipe. The minimum elongation in the weld zone shall be 25%.
13.8.4.3
Threaded connections are not permitted for polyethylene pipe.
COLD WEATHER JOINING OF POLYETHYLENE PIPE
13.9.1 In addition to the generic butt fusion joining procedures (Adopted from the Plastic
Institute (PPI) TR 33/2005 Document) included on the following pages, the following
Cold Weather Procedures (Below 5 C) shall be implemented by Canadian Natural
contractors as necessary to fuse polyethylene pipe in cold weather conditions.
13.9.2 Extreme cold weather (below 20 C with wind) fusions should be avoided due to the
complexities of obtaining a reliable fusion. In the event fusions must be completed,
adhere to the following additional requirements:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 100 of 241
13.9.3 Procedure
13.9.3.1
Preheat heating tool to 260o C and check heating tool temperature with Tempil
sticks. Test three sides of the tool. This is to be done each time the heating tool
is plugged in and four times a day during continuous use.
Record tool temperature on all fusions.
13.9.3.2
13.9.3.3
The immediate area of the fusions may have to be tarped off to reduce the
cooling effects of wind.
13.9.3.4
Alignment of the pipe is more difficult because the plastic is stiffer and
additional mechanical stabilizers may be needed.
13.9.3.5
Allow additional time. At increasingly cold temperatures, the plastic will take
longer to heat due to the low temperature of the pipe. Tarping becomes more
critical to reduce the likelihood of having cold plastic close to the fusion
preventing a proper bond.
13.9.3.6
Heating cycles begin once the bead has fully formed around the entire
circumference of the pipe.
13.9.3.7
Pipe clamps may have to be shimmed to prevent pipe slippage as traction is more
difficult on cold polyethylene.
13.9.4 Inspection:
13.9.4.1
Melt bead must be completely rolled back on both sides and touching the pipe
wall.
13.9.4.2
Melt bead must be of uniform height and width.
13.9.4.3
Pipe fitting or valve ends must be properly aligned.

Caution: Only upon the attainment of all above conditions
shall the join pass inspection. The Inspector should also perform a
spot check (quality control) of the crew by having them cut out a
(random) specimen for testing. The cuts should be 10 cm on either
side of the completed fusion, then a 2 to 3 cm strip can be cut
lengthwise from the coupon. Inspect the internal and external beads
for proper shape and size according to Melt Bead Size Chart (table
13.11.7 below). Freeze the sample and then bend back and forth to
failure. If it fails on the fusion face the crew needs to adjust their
procedure or equipment.
Note: Due to the characteristics of polyethylene fusions, a
successful pressure test does not necessarily mean that all of the
fusions are proper and will hold in the long term.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
13.10
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 101 of 241
GENERIC BUTT FUSION PROCEDURE
13.10.1 Clean the inside and outside of the pipe to be joined by wiping with a clean lint-free
cloth. Remove all foreign matter before clamping the components in the machine.
13.10.2 The pipe ends must be faced to establish clean, parallel mating surfaces. Most, if not all,
equipment manufacturers have incorporated the rotating planer block design in their
facers to accomplish this goal. Facing is continued until a minimal distance exists
between the fixed and movable jaws of the machine and the facer is locked firmly and
squarely between the jaw bushings. This operation provides for a perfectly square face,
perpendicular to the pipe centerline on each pipe end and with no detectable gap.
13.10.3 Remove any pipe chips from the facing operation and any foreign matter with a clean,
untreated, lint-free cotton cloth. The pipe profiles must be rounded and aligned with each
other to minimize mismatch (high-low) of the pipe walls. This can be accomplished by
adjusting clamping jaws until the outside diameters of the pipe ends match. The jaws
must not be loosened or the pipe may slip during fusion. Re-face the pipe ends and
remove any chips from re-facing operation with a clean, untreated, lint-free cotton cloth.
13.10.4 The surface temperatures of the pipe must be in the temperature range of 204-232C.
Heating tools are used that simultaneously heat both pipe ends are used to accomplish
this operation. These heating tools are normally furnished with thermometers to measure
internal heater temperature so the operator can monitor the temperature before each joint
is made. However, the thermometer can be used only as a general indicator because there
is some heat loss from internal to external surfaces, depending on factors such as ambient
temperatures and wind conditions. A pyrometer, Templlstiks or other surface
temperature-measuring device should be used periodically to insure proper temperature
of the heating tool face.
13.10.5 Additionally, heating tools are usually equipped with suspension and alignment guides
that center them on the pipe ends. The heater faces that come into contact with the pipe
should be clean, oil-free and coated with a nonstick coating as recommended by the
manufacturer to prevent molten plastic from sticking to the surfaces. Remaining molten
plastic can interfere with fusion quality and must be removed according to the tool
manufacturers instructions.
13.10.6 To ensure that full and proper contact is made between the pipe ends and the heater, the
initial contact should be under moderate pressure. After holding the pressure very briefly,
it should be released without breaking contact. On larger pipe sizes, initial pressure may
be maintained until a slight melt is observed around the circumference of the pipe before
releasing pressure. Continue to hold the components in contact with the heating element,
without force, while a bead of molten polyethylene develops between the heater and the
pipe ends. Approximate melt bead sizes for various pipe sizes are:
13.10.7 Pipe size
1 and smaller (40mm and smaller)
Above 1 through 3 (40mm-90mm)
Melt bead size

1/32 1/16 (1-2mm)
About 1/16 (2mm)
1/8-3/16 (3-5mm)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 102 of 241

3/16-1/4 (5-6mm)
1/4-7/16 (6-11mm)
About 7/16 (11mm)
About 9/16 (14mm)
Caution - If a concave melt surface is observed, unacceptable pressure

during heating has occurred and the joint will be low quality. Do not continue.
Allow the component ends to cool completely, and restart at the beginning.
13.10.8 When the proper bead size is formed against the heater surfaces, remove the heater
Note-On Holding Pressure
Hold the molten joint immobile under 60-90 psi interfacial fusion pressure until
cooled adequately to develop strength. Allowing proper times under pressure for
cooling prior to removal from the clamps of the machine is important in
achieving joint integrity. The fusion force should be held between the pipe ends
for approximately 30-90 seconds per inch of pipe diameter or until the surface of
the bead is cool to the touch. Avoid pulling, installation or rough handling for an
additional 30 minutes.
Fusion force is determined by multiplying the interfacial pressure 414-620 KPa
(60-90 psi) by the pipe area. For manually operated fusion machines, a torque
wrench can be used to accurately apply the proper force. For hydraulically
operated fusion machines, the fusion force can be divided by the total effective
piston area of the carriage cylinders to give a hydraulic gauge reading. The
gauge reading is theoretical; internal and external drags are added to this figure
to obtain the actual fusion pressure required by the machine. The hydraulic
gauge reading and the interfacial pressure are not the same value.
13.11
13.10.8.1.1
After the heater tool is removed, quickly inspect the pipe ends.
Immediately bring the molten pipe ends together with enough force to
form a double rollback bead against the mating pipe wall.
13.10.8.1.2
Avoid pulling or rough handling of the Joined pipe for approximately 30

minutes.
INSPECTION
13.11.1 Melt bead must be completely rolled back on both sides and touching the pipe wall.
13.11.1.1
Melt bead must be of uniform height and width
13.11.1.2
Pipe fitting or valve ends must be properly aligned.
13.11.1.3
Melt bead must be free of gaps and voids and of the proper size.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 103 of 241
13.12
PRESSURE TESTING- SEE PRESSURE TESTING SECTION 14
13.13
REPAIR OF THERMOPLASTICS
13.13.1 Should repairs be necessary to thermoplastic pipes, the following methods are acceptable
(provided they concur with the manufacturers specifications):
13.13.2 Temporarily repair the defect using full-encirclement clamps approved by the
manufacturer. The repair shall be made permanent within one year.
13.13.3 Cut out the defective portion and replace it with a new portion using pipe or a flange
joined by heat fusion.
13.13.4 Once the repair is complete, a one hour leak test at 110% of the maximum operating
pressure must be completed on the repaired pipe.
13.13.5 Clamp off procedure may be used if done according to clamp manufacturers
recommendations.
13.14
THERMOSET PIPELINES (FIBERGLASS COMPOSITES)
13.14.1 This specification shall apply to thermoset pipelines installed between facilities.
13.14.2 Thermoset is defined as composites that once cured, do not deform with increased
temperatures. Typically thermoset resins are reinforced with glass or carbon fibres.
13.14.2.1
13.15
Fibreglass pipe of various compositions is the most common thermoset

composite.
SERVICE LIMITATIONS
13.15.1 Fibre-reinforced composite pipe shall not be used for conveying natural gas with greater
than 10 mols/km hydrogen sulfide content.
13.15.2 Fibre-reinforced composite pipe may be used for belowground portions of low-vapourpressure (LVP) and gas gathering pipeline systems. It may be terminated a maximum of
650 mm (25 in) aboveground before transitioning to steel pipe.
13.15.3 Gas gathering lines shall not have a design pressure greater than 5000 kPa(725 psi) and
shall have a reinforced wall thickness of at least 3.0 mm (0.118 in).
13.15.4 Multiphase, LVP, oil and oilfield water lines require a reinforced wall thickness of at
least 2.0 mm (0.079 in).
13.15.5 The manufacturer of the fibre-reinforced composite piping being used may have other
service limitations for the material. Review any documentation to ensure the material
application is correct.
13.16
INSTALLATION
13.16.1 Any fiber-reinforced composite material used for pipeline construction or repair must be
submitted to and provide the regulator with sufficient technical information about the
material in order for the regulator to decide whether it is acceptable for use.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 104 of 241
13.16.2 Canadian Natural must be in possession of the Boards approval of the materials,
components or methods before starting construction on non-metallic pipelines.
13.16.3 A minimum 14 gauge metallic marker wire must be installed in the ditch beside (not
below) the pipeline as a tracer for future locating of the pipeline.
13.16.4 Flange installation and joining of pipe must be completed according to the
manufacturers specification by trained and qualified personnel following a documented
procedure.
13.16.5 Fiber-reinforced composite pipelines shall have a depth of cover the same as steel
pipelines.
13.16.6 An assessment must be completed before installing fiber-reinforced composite piping by
ploughing to verify the soil will adequately support, but not damage, the pipe.
13.16.7 Caution is advised when installing fiber-reinforced composite pipeline as pipe, fittings,
joints and adhesives are not compatible between different manufacturers.
13.16.8 The manufacturer of the fiber-reinforced composite piping being used will have more
detailed instructions for the material. Review any documentation to ensure that proper
installation procedures are carried out.
13.17
JOINING
13.17.1 For gas gathering service, fiber-reinforced composite pipe can be joined by one or more
of the following methods:
13.17.1.1
A threaded pipe-to-pipe connection, with factory-moulded or field-moulded

threads in accordance with API 15HR.
13.17.1.2
A threaded pipe-to-pipe connection, with a previously tested and approved thread

type.
13.17.1.3
A pipe-to-component connection using a compatible fibre-reinforced composite

flange.
13.17.1.4
A field-applied splice or compatible fitting (for continuous length pipe).
13.17.2 For other than gas gathering service, fiber-reinforced composite pipe can be joined by
any of the following methods:
13.17.2.1
A threaded pipe-to-pipe connection, with threads in accordance with

requirements of API 15HR.
13.17.2.2
An adhesive bonded joint using an appropriate adhesive for the pipe and
installation and service conditions.
13.17.2.3
A mechanical connection using an elastomeric seal.
13.17.2.4
A compatible fiber-reinforced composite flange.
13.17.2.5
A field-applied splice or compatible fitting (for continuous length pipe).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 105 of 241
13.17.3 When threaded or adhesive-bonded tapered connections are used to transition from fiberreinforced composite pipeline to steel pipeline, the steel shall be on the outside of the
connection. The steel/fiber-reinforced composite joint must be detailed in the design of
the pipeline.
13.17.4 For all piping materials, obtain information on the proper joining procedures from the
pipe manufacturer. The joining procedures shall be documented and tested by the
installation contractor prior to the start of work.
13.17.5 The installation contractor is responsible for ensuring that personnel performing the
joining procedures have been trained and tested in those procedures by the pipe
manufacturer, the manufacturers representative or the pipe installer.
13.17.6 In all cases, the joining procedure shall be documented and the contractor shall provide
evidence of having tested the procedure and having personnel certified to apply the
procedure.
13.18
PRESSURE TESTING
13.18.1 See Pressure testing section 15.

13.19
REPAIRS
13.19.1 Should repairs be necessary to fiber-reinforced composite pipelines, the following

methods are acceptable (provided they concur with the manufacturers specifications):
13.20
13.19.1.1
Cut out the defective portion and replace it with a new portion using an adhesive
bonded collar, repair coupling or flange.
13.19.1.2
Repair clamps approved by the manufacturer and Canadian Natural.
13.19.1.3
Once the repair is complete, a one hour leak test at 110% of the maximum
operating pressure must be completed on the repaired pipe.
CEMENT LINED PIPE
13.20.1 Cement lined pipe is not to be used on new Canadian Natural applications. See section
14 for repair procedure.
13.21
ZAPLOCK PIPE
13.21.1 Zaplock pipe is not to be used on new Canadian Natural applications. The epoxies used
on the joints interfere with the cathodic current and reduces protection of the pipeline.
See section 14 for repair procedure.
13.22
FIBERSPAR PIPE
13.22.1 Fiberspar is not to be used on new Canadian Natural applications.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
13.0
13.23
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 106 of 241
TITE LINER HDPE PIPE
13.23.1 Is approved as a manufacture of pipe used to pull through and line steel pipe. The
primary use of Tite Liner is for corrosive applications such as water and emulsion
service. See manufacturers procedure for installation.
13.24
TUBOSCOPE TK99 AND TK69
13.24.1 Approved as a manufacture of nylon based spray-on liners in steel pipelines. The
primary use of TK99 is for corrosive applications such as water and emulsion service.
See manufacturers procedures for installation.
13.25
FLEX PIPE
13.25.1 The primary use of Flex Pipe is for corrosive applications such as water and emulsion
service. See manufacturers procedures for installation.
13.26
FLEX STEEL
13.26.1 The primary use of Flex Steel is for corrosive applications such as water and emulsion
service. See manufacturers procedures for installation.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
14.0
14.
Page
Page 107 of 241
Pipe Line Repairs
Pipe Line Repairs

Table of Contents
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
14.10
14.11
SCOPE ......................................................................................
PROCESS ..................................................................................
COUPON COLLECTION............................................................
STEEL PIPELINE REPAIR PROCEDURE: ................................
OTHER REPAIR METHODS ......................................................
TEMPORARY REPAIR METHODS ............................................
ZAPLOCK PIPE ........................................................................
CEMENT LINED PIPE ...............................................................
INTERNALLY LINED PIPE .......................................................
ALUMINUM ..............................................................................
THERMOPLASTIC AND THERMOSET MATERIALS ................
14.1
107
107
107
108
109
109
109
109
110
110
110
SCOPE
14.1.1 The provincial regulator must be notified of any leak or break on a pipeline.
14.1.2
In Alberta the ERCB must be notified 48 hours in advance of initiating repair activity on
a sour pipeline.
14.1.3 The Regulator may dictate the method of repair on any failed pipeline.
14.1.4 Pipeline repairs shall be done in accordance of CSA Z662 section 10.
14.2
PROCESS
14.2.1 A CNRL pipeline that is damaged or failed shall be normally repaired by cutting out the
damaged section as a cylinder.
14.2.2 The sampling and transportation of pipe sections from failed or corroded lines should be
performed with the following in mind:
14.2.3 Provide information on the physical location and orientation of the pipes.
14.2.4 Avoid contamination on the sample.
14.2.5 Avoid damage to the corroded surface.
14.2.6 Maintain the condition of associated deposits.
14.3
COUPON COLLECTION
14.3.1 Before cutting out the pipe section, mark the pipe sample to be cut out as to the top of the
line, the direction of flow and most importantly the location. Also circle the failure point
if not obvious. (Use an indelible marker)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
14.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 108 of 241
Pipe Line Repairs
14.3.2 Cold cut out the pipe section. AVOID THE FAILED/CORRODED AREA BY A
MINIMUM OF 30 CENTIMETRES (TWELVE (12) INCHES). Thermal cutting will
cause damage to the sample and make investigation difficult or impossible. If a cutting
torch must be used, the cut(s) should be made a minimum of 0.6 meters (two feet) from
the failed/corroded area.
NOTE:
9
9
9
In situations where the above is not practical, the minimum permissible

length of replacement pipe (as per CSA Z662 10.8.5.3) is:
150 mm for pipe smaller than 168.3 mm OD
Two times the specified outside diameter for pipe in the range from
168.3 to 610 mm OD
1220 mm for pipe larger than 610 mm OD.
14.3.3 Avoid dropping the pipe sample into the trench, as this will contaminate the sample.
14.3.4 Immediately cover the ends of the pipe with plastic and tape securely. DO NOT
SCRAPE, CLEAN OR SPLIT THE PIPE.
14.3.5 Prepare a sheet with pertinent information: type of line, production rates, and distance
from origin (e.g. well, battery, etc.) description of area (e.g. hillside, top of hill, valley
bottom, etc.) previous failures and any other useful information. Note the appearance of
the pipe at the time of sampling.
14.3.6 Bag the pipe sample securely and transport to designated location as directed by the
appropriate CNRL Field Integrity Tech.
14.3.7 Mark the sample with the appropriate WHMIS symbols.
14.3.8 FIT to notify the chemical supplier or failure analysis company if the sample is in transit
to them.
14.4
STEEL PIPELINE REPAIR PROCEDURE:
14.4.1 CNRL replacement policy is that the entire joint of failed pipe plus 600mm of the
adjacent pipe on either end, must be excavated and removed for visual inspection to
ensure integrity.
14.4.2 Once the failed sample is removed, the pipe should be replaced with pretested pipe.
14.4.3 The pretested pipe shall be tested to meet the design criteria of the pipeline and the
requirements of CSA Z662.
14.4.4 Field welds shall be inspected and radiographed in accordance with CSA Z662 sec 7.11.
14.4.5 Non pre-tested pipe can be used as replacement pipe if the entire line will be subject to
pressure testing after the repair.
14.4.6 Reasons for testing the entire line are;
9
To ensure the integrity of the pipeline or;
9
The regulator has stipulated the test.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
14.0
Page
Page 109 of 241
Pipe Line Repairs
14.4.7 The Regulator must be notified 48 hours before the pipeline is returned to service.
14.5
OTHER REPAIR METHODS
14.5.1 Under some circumstances Steel and Fiberglass Reinforcement Repair Sleeves, Steel
Pressure Containment Repair sleeves, Steel compression reinforcement repair sleeves can
be used as permanent or temporary repairs.
14.5.2 Repair sleeves are permissible as permanent repairs, provided that the criteria of CSA
Z662 10.10.4.1 are met.
14.5.3 All sleeve repairs must be approved by the Integrity Coordinators.
14.6
TEMPORARY REPAIR METHODS
14.6.1 As per CSA Z662 10.11 - where it is not practical (usually due to climate and weather
restrictions) to perform permanent repairs immediately, it shall be permissible to repair
piping containing leaks or defects in the form of gouges, grooves, dents, arc burns,
corrosion pits or cracks using temporary repair methods.
14.6.2 All temporary repairs must be approved by the Integrity Coordinator and the regulator.
14.6.3 After temporary repairs are completed, it may be necessary to operate at reduced
pressures until permanent repairs have been made. Integrity Coordinator to advise.
14.6.4 Temporary repairs should be scheduled for permanent repair as soon as practical.
14.6.5 Repair clamps are reusable.
Caution Temporary repair methods are not permissible on Sour
Service applications. Cut outs are mandatory.
14.7
ZAPLOCK PIPE
14.7.1 Zaplock pipe may be repaired by cutting out and replacing cylindrical pieces of pipe
using approved Zaplock fittings and/or an approved welding and inspection procedure.
14.7.2 Welding on internally lined Zaplock pipe should be avoided. If it is not internally lined,
then repair by welding is possible and preferable.
14.8
CEMENT LINED PIPE
14.8.1 If a cut out or tie-in of cement lined pipe is required, the following repair guidelines shall
be followed.
14.8.2 Secure replacement pipe as per CSA Z662 5.5
14.8.3 Locate a contractor with a cement line welding procedure.
14.8.4 Have the welder complete two (2) test welds, one partial penetration weld and one full
penetration weld. These welds will be used to evaluate production welds.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
14.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 110 of 241
Pipe Line Repairs
14.8.5 Send the two samples to a lab for radiography and sectioning. The weld should be
examined to determine penetration and welding defects.
14.8.6 The lab shall determine if the test welds meet the requirements of CSA Z662 for a partial
penetration weld.
14.8.7 If the partial penetration weld fails, review the report with the welder and have the welder
complete another two welds for analysis.
14.8.8 If these two welds fail the welder is unsuitable to continue.
14.8.9 If the original two welds passed then send the welds along with the radiographs to the
welder and inspection company for reference.
14.8.10 Have the welder weld up a sample weld on site, inspect and section. Review the results
compared with the original two welds.
14.8.11 Begin welding production welds and use radiography to confirm results
14.8.12 Radiograph 100% of the circumference of each butt weld.
14.8.13 Partial penetration welds require additional support. The pipeline should be supported at
all locations where the line does not lie flat on the bottom of the ditch.
14.9
INTERNALLY LINED PIPE
14.9.1 Internally lined steel pipe is to be repaired as per the manufacturers recommendations.
14.10
ALUMINUM
14.10.1 Aluminum repairs shall be made by cutting out and replacing sections of the damaged
pipe.
14.10.2 Joining shall only be completed in accordance to the requirements of CSA Z662.
14.11
THERMOPLASTIC AND THERMOSET MATERIALS
14.11.1 See Non Metallic Materials, section 13.0 in this manual.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
15.0
15.
Page
Page 111 of 241
Pressure Tests
Pressure Tests
Table of Contents
15.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................

15.2 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPELINES .......................................
15.3 PIPELINES OPERATING OVER 700 KPA (101 PSIG) ................
15.4 PIPELINES OPERATING UNDER 700 KPA (101 PSIG)..............
15.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR PRESSURE TESTING
THERMOSET PIPELINES ...................................................................
15.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR PRESSURE TESTING
THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINES ...........................................................
15.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON PRESSURE TESTING NEW
THERMOPLASTIC LINED PIPELINES ...............................................
111
111
112
112
112
113
113
SCOPE
15.1
All pressure test shall follow the technical requirements of CSA Z662 and the applicable
provincial regulations.
15.1.1 All pressure test must be reported to the appropriate regulator 48 hours in advance of the
test.
15.1.2 Construction inspector must immediately report any pipeline failure during a pressure test
to the appropriate regulator.
15.1.3 The disposal of a pressure test medium shall be in accordance with the applicable
provincial environmental regulations.
15.1.4
15.2
Paper records of all pressure tests are mandatory and shall be retained for the life
of the pipeline.
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPELINES
15.2.1 A hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure test shall take place after installation, but before a
new pipeline is put into operation.
15.2.2 Water, water with a freeze suppressant or air shall be used.
15.2.3 In Alberta, an engineering assessment and ERCB approval is required prior to an air
pressure test if the test section volume is greater than 125 m3 (4414 ft3). See ERCB IL
2002-02.
15.2.4 The pressure test chart must be continuous and legible and show starting and ending
points of the pressure test. The instrument used to record the pressure reading must be
chosen so the pressure reading is between 25% and 90% of the range of the instrument,
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
15.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 112 of 241
Pressure Tests
with the full range recorded. Calibration of the instrument must be carried out
periodically to within 2% of its range.
15.2.5 Other information to be recorded on the pressure chart (stamp available) are:
9
Time and date of test
9
Inspectors name and signature
9
Location of test section including licence & line number
9
Test medium used
9
Other applicable information as per CSA Z662
15.2.6 The pipeline must be pressure tested with the full depth of earth cover applied
15.3
PIPELINES OPERATING OVER 700 KPA (101 PSIG)
15.3.1 The test pressure shall be 1.25 times the MOP for class locations 1 or 2.
15.3.2 The test pressure shall be 1.4 times the MOP for class locations 3 or 4.
15.3.3 The test pressure shall be 1.4 times the MOP for sour pipelines lines containing more
than 10 Mol/Kmol of H2S or when building to sour specs.
15.3.4 A hydrostatic strength pressure test shall be performed for a period of not less than 4
hours at 1.25 or 1.4 times MOP as appropriate (see above).
15.3.5 A hydrostatic leak pressure test shall be performed for a period of not less than 4 hours at
1.1 times the MOP.
15.3.6 A pneumatic pressure test shall be done for a period of not less than 24 hours.
15.3.6.1
15.4
At no time may gas containing hydrogen sulfide be used as a pressure test

medium.
PIPELINES OPERATING UNDER 700 KPA (101 PSIG)
15.4.1 The test pressure shall be 1.25 times the maximum licensed operating pressure but a
minimum of 700 kPa.
15.4.2 A hydrostatic leak pressure test shall be for a period of not less than 4 hours.
15.4.3 A pneumatic strength and leak pressure test shall be for a period of not less than 24 hours.
Note
If using a gaseous-medium for testing a road or railway crossing that is stressed
to 80% or more of its specified minimum yield strength (SMYS), the pipe shall be
pretested unless the road is closed during the test.
15.5
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR PRESSURE TESTING

THERMOSET PIPELINES
15.5.1 Water or water with freezing-point suppressant shall be used as the test medium.
15.5.2 24 hour concurrent strength and leak tests shall be carried out on the pipeline.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
15.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 113 of 241
Pressure Tests
15.5.3 The test pressure shall be carried out at a minimum of 1.25 times the intended maximum
operating pressures.
15.5.4 The test pressure may not be less than 700 kPa (101 psi).
15.5.5 The manufacturer of the thermoset piping being used may have specific directions for
pressure testing of the material. Review any documentation to ensure that all
requirements are carried out (Some thermoplastic material suppliers may require that the
joints be left exposed during pressure testing).
15.5.6 Maximum test pressures shall not exceed the manufactures published specification and
recommendations.
15.6
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR PRESSURE TESTING

THERMOPLASTIC PIPELINES
15.6.1 Air, water or water with freezing-point suppressant may be used as the test medium.
15.6.2 An air pressure test shall be carried out for a minimum of 24 continuous hours once the
pressure has stabilized.
15.6.3 If water or water with freeze-point suppressant is used the pressure test shall be for a
minimum of 8 continuous hours once the pressure has stabilized.
15.6.4 The pressure test shall be carried out at 1.25 times the design pressure but not less than
700 kPa (101 psi) .
15.6.5 Where lines are segmented into sections for pressure testing, a one hour leak test at 1.1
times the maximum operating pressure must be carried out on the joints reconnected by
heat fusion or flanges.
15.6.6 Pressure testing should preferably be planned to be done over a time frame when the
temperature is expected to remain constant or drop. Avoid pressure testing in direct
sunlight as this will heat up the material and potentially cause a reduction of the yield
point, leading to expansion of the pipe and difficulty in maintaining pressure.
15.6.7 The manufacturer of the thermoplastic piping being used may have specific directions for
pressure testing of the material. Review any documentation to ensure that all
requirements are carried out (Some thermoplastic material suppliers may require that the
joints be left exposed during pressure testing).
15.6.8 Maximum test pressures shall not exceed the manufactures published specification and
recommendations.
15.7
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON PRESSURE TESTING NEW

THERMOPLASTIC LINED PIPELINES
15.7.1 The testing of the steel carrier pipe must be completed prior to installation of the liner.
15.7.2 Air, water or water with freezing-point suppressant shall be the test medium.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
15.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 114 of 241
Pressure Tests
15.7.3 A 4 hour leak test shall be carried out at 100% of MOP. Where test pressure is above
2000 kPa, the pressure shall then be lowered and held for an additional 4 hours.
15.7.4 During pressure test, the annulus vents shall be opened and monitored for pressure build
up or liquid flow. A small pressure build up or flow of liquids may be encountered until
the liner has fully expanded.
15.7.5 For pressure test requirements of existing pipelines before the installation of a liner, see
CSA Z6623.2
Caution When pressure testing existing pipelines that were either abandoned,
discontinued, inactive for over a year or if re-qualifying a pipeline (e.g. after a repair), the
pressure test shall be hydrostatic.
Rev.
Section Number
16.0
16.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Page
Page 115 of 241
Tie-in Welds-Hydrotest Waiver
Tie-in Welds Hydrotest Waiver

Table of Contents
16.1 PROCEDURE FOR ASME B31.3 CARBON STEEL PRESSURE

PIPING AND CSA Z662 TIE-IN WELDS NOT SUBJECTED TO
HYDROSTATIC TESTING .................................................................. 115
16.2 PROCEDURE TO BE USED FOR BUTT WELDED PIPE ............. 115
16.3 PROCEDURE FOR SOCKET WELDED PIPE ............................. 116
16.1
PROCEDURE FOR ASME B31.3 CARBON STEEL PRESSURE PIPING

AND CSA Z662 TIE-IN WELDS NOT SUBJECTED TO
HYDROSTATIC TESTING
16.1.1 Scope
The following outlines the requirements for evaluating and doing tie-ins to
pressure piping systems relative to Hydro Testing or using the Closure Weld
definition of ASME B31.3, clause 345.2.3 (c) and welds that fall under the
definition of tie-in welds as per clause 8.14 of CSA Z662.
16.1.2 This specification applies ONLY in cases where an ENTIRE SYSTEM cannot be
hydrostatically tested. A specific set of requirements must be developed and approved
for each SYSTEM that cannot be hydrostatically tested.
16.1.3 This Guideline is to be used only for closure welds or tie-in welds, and only when
hydrostatic testing is not practical. It is NOT intended as an avenue to circumvent the
requirement for a hydrostatic test.
16.1.4 Prior approval for waiver of hydrotest must be obtained from the Facilities engineer or
the Chief Inspector.
16.1.5 Unless specifically noted, these guidelines apply to both B31.3 and Z662.
16.2
PROCEDURE TO BE USED FOR BUTT WELDED PIPE
16.2.1 The complete tie-in weld (ASME B31.3) from preparation to sign off must be
controlled by the individual who is nominated as the Owners Inspector according to
ASME B31.3. An Inspection Travel Sheet (attached to this specification) must be used to
document inspections that comply with ASME B31.3, Para 344.7. The elements of InProcess Examination are:
a.
Verification of fit-up
b.
Preheat temperature
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
16.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 116 of 241
c.
Ensuring the use of properly conditioned electrodes (new sealed package and
heated)
d.
MPI of the root (or hot pass if the base material is more than 3/8 thick)
e.
MPI or LPI and full RT of the completed weld.
16.2.2 The complete weld (CSA Z662) must be controlled in a similar manner as described
above. The travel sheet shall be used for Z662 welds in the same manner as for B31.3
welds.
16.2.3 The welding procedure for B31.3 welds must be approved by the Company. It must be
qualified to cover the material, wall thickness, and testing required for the materials
involved. The WPS should use low hydrogen electrodes. Use of E-7010 cellulose
electrodes is allowed for the root pass only. A minimum of 150 F (66 C) 25F (14
C) preheat is to be used, or as stipulated by the WPS. The preheat is to be maintained
throughout the welding process and monitored by a minimum of two temperature
indicating crayons (one at each end of the preheat range) or equivalent.
16.2.4 The welding procedure for Z662 welds shall be tested and certified as per clause 7.2 of
Z662 for the pipe material in question. ASME B31.3 qualified welding procedures are
acceptable provided they meet the requirements as stipulated in Z662 7.2.5.
16.2.5 Piping joints shall be prepared as per the welding procedure specification. Bevelled edges
must be visually inspected to ensure proper fit-up.
16.2.6 After completion of the root pass, smooth out the root area by grinding and carry out dry
powder MPI to ensure there are no crack like defects. Maintain minimum preheats during
inspection.
16.2.7 Complete welding according to the weld procedure and wrap the completed weld in an
insulating blanket and allow the weld to cool to ambient temperature as slow as possible.
16.2.8 Final MPI or LPI and 100% RT to be done not less than 1 hour after cooling.
16.2.9 If the joint is to be PWHT, the NDE must be done following the PWHT and may be done
as soon as it cools to ambient temperature. It is recommended that NDE also be done
prior to PWHT to ensure that the welds are acceptable prior to heating. The PWHT shall
be done as specified in the WPS, and the applicable code.
16.2.10 The new piping spools that are being tied-in must be previously hydro tested and all
documentation completed and signed off by the appropriate authorities.
16.3
PROCEDURE FOR SOCKET WELDED PIPE

All of the above apply as appropriate except:
16.3.1 Preheat the joint to minimum 150 F (66 C) 25F (14 C) or as specified in WPS and
maintain for the duration of the welding process.
16.3.2 Perform MPI at least 1 hour after the weld has cooled to ambient temperature. Wet
contrast method is preferred.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
16.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 117 of 241
16.3.3 Radiograph the weld to ensure the gap is acceptable (1/16 or 1.6 mm).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
16.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 118 of 241
Examination Record Sheet

For ASME B31.3 Piping and CSA Z662 Pipeline Tie-ins
That Are NOT Hydro Tested
Job No. _____________
Drawing No. _________
Operation
QC
Personnel
Date
CNR
Inspector
Approvals for Tie-ins - attach a copy

WPS approved and registered with ABSA (B31.3 only)
Welders qualified for the procedure
Welding procedure reviewed with Welders
Material Specification verified against drawings
Spools hydro tested prior to installation
AB 83 received for spools (B31.3 only)
Preheat ____F maintained
Monitored with __________ (e.g. Tempilstik)
Welding electrodes properly conditioned
Fit up and weld preparation checked
Dry powder MT of root/hot pass
Visual inspection of completed welds
Heat treatment reviewed and chart filed
Temp. 1175F 25F - Time ____ hours (if applicable)
Weld insulation wrapped upon completion for slow cooling
MT/PT of finished weld ____ hours after cooling to ambient
(if applicable)
MT/PT of attachment welds
100% RT of finished weld - Interpretation criteria
Normal Fluid Service - 100% criteria
RT of socket weld for gap (1/16)
NDE interpreted and signed by a level II examiner
Welds identified with welders symbol or recorded on dwg
NDE and heat treatment recorded on dwg
Construction & Test Data Report AB-83 completed (B31.3
only)
Add 1)
Add 2)
- All of the applicable steps listed above must be signed by both the Contractors QC Personnel and the
designated CNR Inspector.
- Additional requirements may be requested for any particular job.
________________
Date
________________
Date
______________________________
Contractors QC Inspector
______________________________
CNR Inspector
Date
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
16.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 119 of 241
Canadian Natural Resources Limited

Hydrostatic Test Waiver Request Form
CNR Facility: ________________
Drawing No: __________________
Tie-in No: ____________________
Line Mat. Spec. ________________
Fitting Mat. Spec. ______________
Design Press. _________________
Operating Press. _______________
Service ______________________
AQP No. _____________________
Line Size ________________________

Schedule or W.T. _________________
Fitting Schedule or W.T. ___________
Design Temp. ____________________
Operating Temp. __________________
Welding Contractor ________________
WPS No. ________________________
Reason for waiving hydrostatic pressure test:

Unable to isolate system.
Impracticable due to volume of the line.
Contamination to process.
Details: ________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Approved: Facilities Engineer: _________________________ Date: ____________
Or Chief Inspector: __________________________ Date: ____________
Attach copies of drawings or isometrics with tie-ins marked in yellow.
This form to be submitted with new or revised piping registrations, if applicable.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
17.0
17.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 120 of 241
Over Pressure Protection

Table of Contents
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
SCOPE ......................................................................................
GENERAL .................................................................................
WELLHEAD TO PIPELINE .......................................................
COMPRESSOR STATIONS ........................................................
PUMP STATIONS ......................................................................
17.1
120
120
121
121
121
SCOPE
17.1.1 A pressure-control system shall be installed where two or more pipelines are connected
and their licensed MOPs differ by more than 5% of the lower MOP line ( See Alberta
Regulation 22).
17.1.2 An overpressure protection system shall also be installed where the failure of the
pressure-control system (above) makes it possible to pressurize the piping above its
licensed MOP (CSA Z662-4.14).
17.2
GENERAL
17.2.1 The pressure-control system shall be either a:

17.2.1.1
Regulator;
17.2.1.2
Pressurecontrol valve (fail safe);
17.2.1.3
Speed control of a pump or compressor.
17.2.2 The over-pressure protection system shall be either an automatic:

17.2.2.1
Regulator;
17.2.2.2
Pressure-limit override on a control valve;
17.2.2.3
Pressure-activated isolation valve;
17.2.2.4
On/off control of a pump or compressor;
17.2.2.5
Pressure relieving system such as:

9 Pressure-activated blowdown valve;
9 Pressure relief valve (PSV);
9 Rupture disks.
17.2.3 Although the over-pressure protection system may be similar, it must operate
independently from the pressure control system.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
17.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 121 of 241
17.2.4 Pressure relieving systems (other than dry sweet natural gas) must be piped to an
approved knock out tank and/or flare system.
Caution: Due to the additional design and maintenance activities involved in
pressure-relieving systems, they are to be restricted and must be approved by the
Integrity Coordinator before installation.
17.3
WELLHEAD TO PIPELINE
17.3.1 Same as above

17.4
COMPRESSOR STATIONS
17.4.1 In addition to normal compressor safety equipment, to protect the pipeline, positive
displacement gas compressors shall have a pressure relieving system installed between
the compressor and the first block valve on the discharge side of the compressor (CSA
Z662 4.18)
17.5
PUMP STATIONS
17.5.1 In addition to normal pump safety equipment, to protect the pipeline, positive
displacement pump units shall have a pressure relieving system installed between the
pump unit and the first block valve on the discharge side of the pump (CSA Z662).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
18.0
18.
Page
Page 122 of 241
Crossings
Crossings
Table of Contents
18.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................

18.2 HIGHWAY, ROAD AND RAILWAY CROSSINGS.......................
18.3 WATER CROSSINGS .................................................................
18.4 ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION LINES .....................................
18.5 CROSSING FOREIGN PIPELINES /CABLES .............................
18.6 THIRD PARTY CROSSING CNRL PIPELINES ..........................
18.7 CROSSING EXISTING CNRL PIPELINES BY CANADIAN
NATURAL CONSTRUCTION ..............................................................
18.8 CATHODIC PROTECTION ........................................................
18.9 INSTALLATION OF SIGNS .......................................................
18.1
122
122
123
123
123
123
124
124
124
SCOPE
18.1.1 Pipeline crossings, road crossings, utility cable crossings and irrigation canal crossings
shall be done in accordance with CSA Z662 and provincial regulations.
18.1.2 As-built records of crossings shall be prepared by the contractor.
18.2
HIGHWAY, ROAD AND RAILWAY CROSSINGS
18.2.1 Shall be bored unless CNRL approves open cut for unusual circumstances.
18.2.2 Road and rail crossings may be either cased or uncased; in both cases the limitations of
CSA Z662 4.12 and as stated in Table 4.10 &11 shall apply. Non cased is preferred
unless casing is required under the crossing agreement.
18.2.3 Centralizers and a suitable pipe coating that resists damage must be used when pulling
pipe through a bore. The coating must be selected in consideration of soil conditions.
18.2.4 When using a cased crossing, ensure there is no electrical contact between the casing and
the metal carrier pipe, as this will negate the effects of the cathodic protection.
Contractor to test for sufficient isolation.
18.2.5 The casing and carrier pipe shall be sealed with a non conductive material.
18.2.6 If sealed casing us used, a pressure relieving device (if pressure can exceed 35 kPa) or an
above ground vent shall be installed.
18.2.7 If casing or thicker wall pipe is used under a highway, road or railway, the casing or
thicker wall pipe shall extend for the full width of the right of way.
18.2.8 Unless specified in the crossing agreement, the minimum earth cover must be:
9
1.5 meters within the ROW of a highway or (railway).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
18.0
Page 123 of 241
Crossings
9
9
18.3
Page
1.5 meters within the ROW of a road.

2.0 meters below base of railway
WATER CROSSINGS
18.3.1 Shall be bored unless Canadian Natural approves open for cut unusual circumstances.
18.3.2 Bank stability, flooding, water and ice action all require attention. Special care may be
needed in areas where the geological structure changes as per CSA Z662 4.12.4.
18.3.3 River weights, anchors or other means shall be used to maintain the position of the
pipeline.
18.4
ELECTRICAL TRANSMISSION LINES
18.4.1 CSA standard C22.3 No. 6 applies to pipelines in close proximity to electrical
transmission lines and in areas where high short-circuit potentials exist. The main
concern is the effect stray current can have on the efficiency of cathodic protection
systems. Inspector to assess.
18.4.2 The contractor shall be responsible to operate and move his equipment in a safe manner
in a vicinity of overhead power lines.
18.5
CROSSING FOREIGN PIPELINES /CABLES
18.5.1 Shall be crossed in accordance with the instructions and drawings supplied by the
owner/operator.
18.6
18.5.1.1
CNRL contractor shall give a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the foreign
owner or representative prior to construction unless otherwise stated.
18.5.1.2
During installation, Canadian Naturals contractor shall have a copy of the

crossing agreement
18.5.1.3
The minimum clearance between a Canadian Natural pipeline and foreign line
shall be 0.6 meters.
THIRD PARTY CROSSING CNRL PIPELINES
18.6.1 Shall be crossed in accordance with the standard agreements, instructions and drawings
supplied by Canadian Natural (supplied by the Land Dept.).
18.6.1.1
The minimum clearance between CNRL pipeline and the foreign line shall be 0.6
meters. The pipeline shall be maintained at the same depth with no bends for the
entire width of the crossing area.
18.6.1.2
Third party shall give a minimum of 72 hours written notice to Canadian Natural
prior to construction.
18.6.1.3
During installation, third party contractor shall have a copy of the Canadian
Natural crossing agreement.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
18.0
18.7
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 124 of 241
Crossings
CROSSING EXISTING CNRL PIPELINES BY CANADIAN NATURAL

CONSTRUCTION
18.7.1 Crossing agreements between construction and operation must be documented. This can
be in the form of a memo, email or other traceable document.
18.7.2 Operations shall have a representative present during the crossing. The representative
may by be the construction supervisor, IF SO DESIGNATED by operations
18.8
18.8.1
18.9
CATHODIC PROTECTION
Steel sections (used for crossings) of non-metallic pipelines shall be cathodically
protected. See cathodic protection in section 22.0 for details.
INSTALLATION OF SIGNS
18.9.1 Contractor shall install signs prior to operation of the pipeline at all highway, road,
railway and watercourse crossings.
18.9.2 Signs shall be in accordance with provincial regulations and contain accurate
information.
18.9.3 Signs shall be consistent in size, format and information for each pipeline licence.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
19.0
19.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 125 of 241
Pipeline Weights and Rock Guards

Table of Contents
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
19.8
SCOPE ......................................................................................
GENERAL PIPELINE WEIGHTING ..........................................
EXTRA HEAVY WALL PIPE .....................................................
SAND FILLED BAG WEIGHTS..................................................
CONCRETE BOLT-ON WEIGHTS .............................................
SCREW ANCHORS ....................................................................
GENERAL-PIPELINE ROCK GUARDS ......................................
ROCK GUARD PRODUCTS .......................................................
19.1
125
125
125
125
126
126
126
126
SCOPE
The application of pipeline weights and rock guards shall consider site specific
requirements and an appropriate method shall be chosen.
19.2
GENERAL PIPELINE WEIGHTING
19.2.1 Canadian Natural pipelines shall be weighted to a minimum negative buoyancy of five
percent (-5%) to maintain depth of pipe in wet lands.
19.2.2 The method and material used to address buoyancy shall not cause detrimental effects to
the piping and coating.
19.2.3 A CNRL spreadsheet is available (from pipeline coordinators) to calculate buoyancy
requirements.
19.2.4 Weights or other means shall used to maintain the position of pipelines under all water
crossings.
19.3
EXTRA HEAVY WALL PIPE
19.3.1 Can be used to achieve the -5% buoyancy requirement without the use of additional
pipeline weights.
19.3.2 Preferred on all lines 6 or smaller:
9
7.1 mm for 6 pipe
9
4.8 mm for 4 pipe
9
4.8 mm for 3 pipe
19.4
SAND FILLED BAG WEIGHTS
19.4.1 Are preferred where applicable due to the minimal potential of damage to the pipeline
coating.
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
19.0
Page
Page 126 of 241
19.4.2 Spacing shall be determined with consideration of conditions and within manufactures
recommendations.
19.4.3 Saddle Tech Inc. is an approved vendor (ph 1-888-833-5661).
19.5
CONCRETE BOLT-ON WEIGHTS
19.5.1 Are acceptable if extreme care is taken to minimize damage to the pipe and coating.
19.5.2 All rocks and debris shall be cleared from the inside of saddles before installation.
19.5.3 Winter conditions shall necessitate extra caution of frozen material adhering to inside of
saddles before installation.
19.6
SCREW ANCHORS
19.6.1 Must have Pipeline Coordinator approval for use.

19.7
GENERAL-PIPELINE ROCK GUARDS
19.7.1 The method and material shall be adequate to protect the pipe and coating from the
detrimental effects of rocks and debris within the pipeline ditch.
19.7.2 Manufacturers recommendations must be considered in the choice of rock guard.
19.8
ROCK GUARD PRODUCTS
19.8.1 Field wrapped Sleeves

19.8.1.1
product is used as an economical method of protecting pipe through low to

moderate rock ground
19.8.1.2
Pipe must contain regular protective coating before application.
19.8.1.3
Product is wrapped on pipe before lowering into ditch.
19.8.1.4
Tuff N Nuff is an approved product.
19.8.2 Fusion Bond Epoxy

19.8.2.1
Used as per manufacturers recommendations.
19.8.3 Insulated pipe

19.8.3.1
19.8.4 Multilayer Systems

19.8.4.1
Products offers both protection from mechanical damage and corrosion
19.8.4.2
Pipe comes from factory with coating applied.
19.8.4.3
Garneau Inc & Shaw Pipe Protection are approved suppliers.
19.8.5 Protection Sleeve
Rev.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
19.0
Page
Page 127 of 241
19.8.5.1
Product is used for specialty applications such as directional drills where damage
to the regular pipe coating is likely.
19.8.5.2
Pipe must contain regular protective coating before application of sleeve.
19.8.5.3
Product is pulled onto pipe (sheathed) before laying in ditch or pulling through
bore.
19.8.5.4
Dragon Skin is approved product.
19.8.6 Other Specialty Coatings

19.8.6.1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
20.0
20.
Page
Page 128 of 241
Pipeline Bending
Pipeline Bending
Table of Contents
20.1
20.2
THE
20.3
20.4
20.1
SCOPE ......................................................................................
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS: BENDS SHALL BE FREE FROM
FOLLOWING ..............................................................................
FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS .............................................
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ..........................................
128
128
128
129
SCOPE
It is permissible to bend pipe to compensate for the changes in the ditch both vertically
and horizontally.
20.1.1 When making shop bends or field bends in steel line pipe, proper procedures shall be
followed to ensure that bends do not contain deficiencies that will negatively affect
pipeline integrity.
20.1.2 CSA Z662 section 6.2.3 and the following shall be followed for all bends.
20.2
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS: BENDS SHALL BE FREE FROM THE

FOLLOWING
20.2.1 Buckles, wrinkles, flat spots, cracks, and other evidence of mechanical damage.
20.2.2 Damage to coating (where applicable).
20.2.3 Excess ovality (the difference between the minimum and maximum diameters shall not
exceed 5% of the specified outside diameter of the pipe).
20.3
FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
20.3.1 The minimum radius of any bend shall be 20 times the specified outside diameter of the
pipe (i.e. minimum 20D bend).
20.3.2 For seamless pipe, hot bending is preferred to minimize stresses associated with
increased wall thickness.
20.3.3 For electric resistance welded (ERW) pipe, cold bending is preferred to minimize
problems associated with thinner wall thickness and possible strength reduction from heat
associated with the induction process.
20.3.4 For ERW pipe, the long-seam weld should be oriented at or near the neutral axis of the
pipe.
20.3.5 No field bends (cold bends) shall be made when the ambient temperature is lower than
minus 25oC.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
20.0
20.4
Page
Page 129 of 241
Pipeline Bending
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
20.4.1 All pipe shall be laid so that it conforms with the contour of the trench and does not
introduce unacceptable stresses to the pipe.
20.4.1.1
Over bends shall be made such that the middle of the bend clears the high point
of the trench.
20.4.1.2
Sag bends shall fit the bottom of the trench.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
21.0
21.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 130 of 241
Coatings
Coatings
21.1
SEE SECTION 15.01 OF CNRL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
22.0
22.
Page
Page 131 of 241
Cathodic Protection
Cathodic Protection
Table of Contents
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
SCOPE ......................................................................................
PROCESS ..................................................................................
IMPRESSED CURRENT RECTIFIERS .......................................
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC SYSTEMS ..........................
22.1
131
131
131
131
SCOPE
22.1.1 Cathodic protection is an electrochemical based process designed to protect pipelines and
other metallic facilities from the natural progression of oxygenation and degeneration.
22.2
PROCESS
22.2.1 All new metallic pipelines and facilities must be cathodically protected within one year of
construction.
22.2.2 All underground metal parts of non metallic pipelines such as steel risers on fibreglass
and polyethylene lines shall be cathodically protected.
22.2.3 All cathodic protection systems shall be installed in accordance to CGA OCC1.
22.2.4 All cathodic systems (other than small sacrificial anodes) shall be installed by a qualified
cathodic installation contractor.
22.2.5 Integrity coordinators to be consulted on all cathodic requirements before construction
22.3
IMPRESSED CURRENT RECTIFIERS
22.3.1 Is the most common cathodic system used for protecting large metallic pipelines and
other major facilities.
22.3.2 New pipelines or facilities may be protected by simple attachment to an existing structure
that is cathodically protected
22.3.3 In the absence of and existing cathodic tie-in, a new system shall be designed and
installed by a qualified cathodic installation contractor.
22.4
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC SYSTEMS
22.4.1 Is the attachment of a magnesium or zinc anode to a metal structure to be protected.

22.4.2 An approximate seven pound magnesium anode bag or four pound zinc anode is
sufficient to protect a typical steel riser. On other applications, the anode shall be sized
(according to the metal structure it is protecting) by the Integrity Coordinator in
consultation with a cathodic company.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
22.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 132 of 241
Cathodic Protection
22.4.3 The anode is attached by mechanical means or Thermite welded to the pipe or structure,
then buried to a minimum depth of six feet.
22.4.4 Installations shall be installed according to the standard drawing Sacrificial Anode
Installation drawing # TYPPIP 590-1602 located online at
I:Facilities\Drawings\PIPELINE\TYPICAL PIPELINE.
Caution : If using a Thermite weld connection to attach the test leads/anode to the
pipe, the guidelines of CSA Z662 contained in section 9.0 must be followed.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
23.0
23.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 133 of 241
Corrosion Monitoring Requirements

Table of Contents
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
SCOPE ......................................................................................
COUPONS .................................................................................
LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE (LPR) PROBES ..........
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE (ER) PROBES ..............................
FIELD SIGNATURE METHOD (FSM) ........................................
23.1
133
133
133
134
134
SCOPE
23.1.1 Any metallic pipeline or facility is susceptible to corrosion. It may be necessary to install
corrosion monitoring equipment at the time of construction.
23.1.2 All corrosive applications mist be assessed for the need for corrosion monitoring before
the pipeline or facility is constructed
23.1.3 Selection and placement shall be determined by the Pipeline Coordinators in consultation
with the Integrity Coordinators/Field Integrity Techs.
23.2
COUPONS
23.2.1 Are the most common intrusive device used to indicate the overall rate of corrosion.
They consist of a metal sample similar to the pipeline or vessel material.
23.2.2 Are inserted into the pipeline or facility via a coupon holder that is secured to the
structure.
23.2.3 Holders allow a metal coupon to be inserted and removed as required.
23.2.4
23.3
Caution : Field Integrity techs only to install coupons. The insertion of coupon
samples require extremely careful handling to maintain the accuracy of the results.
Coupons must be handled by the edges using protective latex gloves to avoid the
introduction of skin oils or other contamination when installing or removing them.
LINEAR POLARIZATION RESISTANCE (LPR) PROBES
23.3.1 Are an applied current based intrusive device used to indicate the overall rate of
corrosion. They consist of a metal probe and are inserted into the pipe or facility and into
the service fluid.
23.3.2 LPR probes are inserted into the pipeline or facility via an access fitting that is secured to
the structure.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
23.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 134 of 241
23.3.3 LPR devices are located at strategic locations

23.4
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE (ER) PROBES
23.4.1 Are an electrical resistance sensing intrusive device used to indicate localized corrosion.
The consist of a metal probe and are inserted into the pipe or facility and into the service
fluid. As the probe corrodes, the electrical chemical resistance is correlated to a
corrosion rate.
23.4.2 ER probes are inserted into the pipeline or facility via an access fitting that is secured to
the structure
23.5
FIELD SIGNATURE METHOD (FSM)
23.5.1 Are an applied current based non intrusive device used to indicate the overall rate of
corrosion. They consist of sensing elements attached to the surface of the structure.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
24.0
24.
Page
Page 135 of 241
Pigging Facilities
Pigging Facilities
SCOPE THE FOLLOWING TABLE C/W NOTES IS A GENERAL
GUIDELINE FOR WHEN PIGGING FACILITIES ARE REQUIRED ON
NEW PIPELINES. FINAL DECISIONS SHALL BE MADE BY PIPELINE
COORDINATORS AFTER CONSULTATION WITH INTEGRITY
COORDINATORS.
24.1
Full Scale
Pigging
Facilities
(Launchers
R6
R2
R1
R7
Fuel Gas Lines
Low Vapor
Pressure (LVP)
High Vapor
Pressure (HVP
or NGL)
Natural Gas
(Sweet,
Dehydrated)
Crude Oil
(100%)
Sour Natural
Gas
Note
3
R8
R9
R9
Fresh Water
R1
Salt Water
(Produced)
Pigging
Valve Only
Oil Well
Effluent
(Group &
Fl li )
Natural Gas
(Wet, Sweet)
Type of
Line
Sour Natural
Gas (Wet)
TABLE #
PIGGING FACILITY VS. SERVICE ENVIRONMENT MATRIX
NA4
R5
Comments
See Notes
Below
R9
and
Receivers)
Definitions:
R
NA
Recommended. See Notes if applicable.

Not Applicable. See Notes if applicable.
NOTES:
1. Initially oil emulsion pipelines need to be pigged for wax and paraffin control. Heavy oil
pipelines need to be pigged for solids and corrosion control. As the water cut reaches the 20
40% level, pipelines may have to be pigged for corrosion control. Batch inhibition programs are
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
24.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 136 of 241
Pigging Facilities
often a key part of the corrosion control program. Oil well flow lines should have a pigging valve
as a minimum. Group flow lines should have full scale pigging facilities.
2. Wet, sweet gas lines with low C02 partial pressures (below 50 kPa or 7 PSI C02 partial pressure)
may need pigging facilities for:
Hydrate control
Production pigging to remove fluids (water and/or condensate) and reduce line pressure.
Remove sand, scale or other solids
To minimize corrosion
3 No pigging facilities are required for fuel gas lines.
4 Salt or produced water lines should be internally coated and/or lined and should not require
pigging.
5 If fresh water lines are internally coated and/or lined, they should not require pigging. If fresh
water lines are internally bare, they should be designed with pigging facilities so that they can be
pigged for removal of deposits.
6 Full scale pigging facilities are recommended for wet, sour gas pipelines because a batch
inhibition program is often part of the corrosion mitigation program. It is much easier to keep a
batch slug together with full scale pigging facilities.
7 Full scale pigging facilities are recommended for wet, sweet gas pipelines with high CO2, partial
pressures (greater than 50 kPa or 7 PSI C02 partial pressure) because a batch inhibition program is
often part of the corrosion mitigation program. Corrosion at the 12 oclock position is a concern
on sweet gas pipelines and a batch treatment is necessary for the corrosion inhibitor to contact the
top part of the pipeline. It is much easier to keep a batch slug together with full scale pigging
facilities.
8 Clean oil or condensate (100% oil) should have full scale pigging facilities to allow pigging to
control wax and/or paraffin and also for self-contained smart pigs.
9 Sweet, dehydrated natural gas lines, HVP and LVP pipelines should have full scale pigging
facilities to be able to pig following process upsets. They also should have full scale pigging
facilities to allow self-contained smart pigs.
10 Medium density polyethylene pigs should be used in high density polyethylene (HDPE) lined
pipelines. Disc type pigs may get caught on, or tear, the internal polyethylene weld.
Caution Reuse of pig traps is allowed within CNRL as long as there is traceability to
the pressure and service. Pig traps that are removed from existing systems shall be tagged
with the pipeline licence and line number so that we maintain traceability to pressure and
service.
Rev.
Section Number
25.0
25.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Page
Page 137 of 241
Discontinuation and Abandonment

Table of Contents
25.1
25.2
25.3
SCOPE ...................................................................................... 137

DISCONTINUATION PROCEDURE ........................................... 137
ABANDONMENT PROCEDURE ................................................. 137
25.1
SCOPE
25.1.1 The responsibility of discontinuing or abandoning a pipeline is a joint effort between the
field staff and the A&D Coordinators.
25.1.2 Pipelines can remain in the discontinued or abandoned state for an indefinite period of
time and potentially reactivated (with regulatory approval) if required.
25.1.3 The requirements of the Alberta regulation 82 and other provincial regulations shall be
followed.
25.2
DISCONTINUATION PROCEDURE
25.2.1 Construction Inspector to review construction package and complete the required
notifications including One Call and ground disturbance agreements.
25.2.2 Pipeline must be pigged and cleaned of all service fluids and products.
25.2.3 Pipeline segment must be chemically inhibited if suspect corrosive fluids still exist.
25.2.4 Pipeline ends must be blind flanged or capped to safely isolate line from the operating
system
25.2.5 Cathodic protection must be maintained
25.2.6 Signage is maintained
25.2.7 Construction Inspector completes COS form and forwards to A&D coordinator in
Calgary for data base update and regulatory notification.
25.2.8 All project documentation completed and forwarded to Field Integrity Tech
See attachment for Detailed Guideline on Discontinuations.

25.3
ABANDONMENT PROCEDURE
25.3.1 Construction Inspector to review construction package and complete the required
notifications including One Call and ground disturbance agreements.
25.3.2 Pipeline must be pigged and cleaned of all service fluids and products.
25.3.3 Pipeline left with air or fresh water inside (no chemicals or corrosion inhibitors allowed).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
25.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 138 of 241
25.3.4 All surface equipment is to be removed (unless located within the boundaries of a facility
that will continue to operate).
25.3.5 If pipeline originates at a well, the pipe is to be cut at the lease edge and removed within
the lease (this aids in reclamation activities that may be required for the well site). An
exception is when there are other pipelines on that wellsite to be left operating or in a
discontinued state.
25.3.6 The pipeline is isolated by cutting and permanently capping by mechanical or welded
means.
25.3.7 All pipeline ends identified with a tag indicating licensee, licence and line number, date
of abandonment and media left inside the pipeline.
25.3.8 Cathodic protection removed.
25.3.9 Signage is maintained.
25.3.10 Construction Inspector completes COS form and forwards to A&D coordinator in
Calgary for data base update and regulatory notification.
25.3.11 Land agreements will be relinquished by Canadian Naturals environmental group.
25.3.12 All project documentation to be completed and forwarded to the Field Integrity Tech.
See attachment for Detailed Guideline on Abandonment.
Caution Any pipeline discontinuation or abandonment shall not be done in a manner

that results in an adjoining operating pipeline having fittings or connection points remaining
that would create stagnant fluid traps (dead legs).
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
26.0
26.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 139 of 241
Pipeline Reactivations
Table of Contents
26.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................

26.2 INACTIVE PIPELINES (NOT OPERATING BUT NOT
DISCONTINUED OR ABANDONED) REGISTERED AS OPERATING ..
26.3 DISCONTINUED PIPELINES ....................................................
26.4 ABANDONED PIPELINES .........................................................
26.5 RESUMPTION PROCESS DIAGRAM .........................................
26.1
139
139
139
140
141
SCOPE
26.1.1 The Alberta Pipeline Regulations stipulates that any pipeline that has been discontinued,
abandoned or out of service for over 12 months requires ERCB approval before it is
activated. All provinces have adopted similar regulations.
26.1.2 The reactivation must be done in accordance with all applicable provincial regulations.
26.1.3 The reactivation process shall follow the Canadian Natural Pipeline Integrity
Resumption process flow chart (See Appendix) and the following:
26.2
INACTIVE PIPELINES (NOT OPERATING BUT NOT DISCONTINUED

OR ABANDONED) REGISTERED AS OPERATING
26.2.1 Must be reactivated as per the Resumption process flow chart.

26.2.2 The ERCB or other regulator verbally notified and approval granted before reactivation.
26.3
DISCONTINUED PIPELINES

26.3.1.1
A formal ERCB (or other regulator) application must be initiated by the Integrity
Coordinator in Calgary. The application must address the following actions:
26.3.1.2
Verify the internal integrity of the pipeline (may require an internal inspection or
the removal of cut-outs).
26.3.1.3
Verify the external integrity of the coating (may require an over the line survey
looking for holidays or the excavation of sample points to physically evaluate the
coating).
26.3.1.4
Ensure the cathodic protection is operating and protecting the line. The
construction inspector to ensure the pipeline is not isolated from the active
cathodic protection system in the area.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
26.0
26.4
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 140 of 241
26.3.1.5
Hydrotest the pipeline to as per Z662. If a gaseous medium pressure test is

desired, in Alberta ERCB written approval is required.
26.3.1.6
Verify the MOPs and H2S levels are compatible with that of the connecting
pipelines.
26.3.1.7
The completed reactivation application must be forwarded to the ERCB or other

regulator for final authorization.
26.3.1.8
Once activated, a COS form is filled out and forwarded to the FIT or IC for
regulatory notification and in-house status change in Pipe Manager.
ABANDONED PIPELINES

26.4.1.1
A formal ERCB or other regulator application must be initiated by the Integrity

Coordinator in Calgary. The application must address the following actions:
26.4.1.2
Ensure land work has been completed and the landowners and occupants have
agreed to the resumption (to be executed by the Canadian Natural land dept).
26.4.1.3
Verify that an active right-a-way agreement still exist for the pipeline.
26.4.1.4
Verify the land title has an active caveat attached for the pipeline.
26.4.1.5
Verify landowner and occupant notification and non-objection.
26.4.1.6
Verify the internal integrity of the pipeline (may require an internal inspection or
the removal of cut outs).
26.4.1.7
Verify the external integrity of the coating (may require an over the line survey
looking for holidays or the excavation of sample points to physically evaluate the
coating).
26.4.1.8
The construction inspector to arrange to have cathodic protection reactivated or

installed. Regulations require that the line be cathodically protected prior to the
resumption of service.
26.4.1.9
Verify crossings are Z662 compliant. Road and railway crossings must meet the
current requirements of Z662. (The road owners and the railroad companies
should have been notified and will identify any issues.
26.4.1.10
If the crossing is not Z662 compliant, IC to assess and potentially develop case to
support not upgrading. Alternatively remove the crossing and install a crossing
that is Z662 compliant.
26.4.1.11
Verify the class location of the pipeline. Determine if the class has changed
since construction and confirm that the pipe specifications are still satisfactory.
26.4.1.12
Hydrotest the pipeline to as per Z662. If a gaseous medium pressure test is

desired, ERCB written approval is required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
26.0
Page
Page 141 of 241
26.4.1.13
Verify the reason for the abandonment. Proof must be obtained that the line was
not abandoned for integrity reasons (excessive failures etc.).
26.4.1.14
Verify the MOPs and H2S levels are compatible with that of the connecting
pipelines.
26.4.1.15
A formal Engineering Assessment must be prepared containing the results of the

above investigations.
26.4.1.16
The completed reactivation application and engineering assessment must be

forwarded to the ERCB or other regulator for final authorization.
26.4.1.17
Once activated, a COS form is filled out and forwarded to the FIT or IC for
regulatory notification and in-house status change in Pipe Manager.
Caution All inactive, discontinued or abandoned pipelines must have
regulatory approval before resuming production!
26.5
RESUMPTION PROCESS DIAGRAM

See the following linked document to view the Resumption Process diagram:
Resumption Process Jan 06.pdf.
Rev.
Section Number
27.0
27.
Rev. Date
March 2009
3.0
Section Name
Page
Page 142 of 241
Re-licensing Pipelines: Sweet to Sour

Table of Contents
27.1 SCOPE ......................................................................................

27.2 GENERAL .................................................................................
27.3 PROCESS ..................................................................................
27.4 SAMPLING CRITERIA FOR SOUR SERVICE CONVERSION
FLOW CHART ....................................................................................
27.1
142
142
143
143
SCOPE
27.1.1 The ERCB and other regulatory bodies require an application for a conversion of a sweet
registered pipeline to transport sour natural gas. Sour natural gas is considered sour for
materials purposes, by a partial pressure criteria.
27.1.1.1
For gas pipelines the line is sour if the partial pressure of the H2S is 0.30 kPa or
greater as determined by: (H2S (moles/kilomole) X MOP (kPa)) divided by 1000
= partial pressure. See section 8.0 for details.
27.1.1.2
For oil effluent pipelines the line is sour if the partial pressure of the H2S is 0.30
kPa or greater as determined by same formula: See ERCB Directive 56.
27.1.2 An application is also required when a natural gas line containing H2S is licensed for less
than 10 mol/km of H2S, and exceeds or intends to exceed that limit.
27.2
GENERAL
When a sweet to sour pipeline conversion is considered, the following steps must be
taken:
27.2.1 Coordinated through the appropriate CNRL Integrity Coordinator in Calgary.

27.2.2 A non-routine application completed in accordance with ERCB Directive 56 or other
regulator as required. This should include the applicable sections of the ERCB
Checklist for Minimum Technical Requirements for Pipeline Applications.
27.2.3 The Integrity Coordinator must prepare an application which is supported by an
engineering assessment, demonstrating compliance with the sour service requirements of
CSA Z662.
27.2.4 ERCB or equivalent approval obtained.
27.2.5 CNRL safety group informed so amendments to the Emergency Response Plan (ERP)
can be assessed.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
27.0
27.3
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 143 of 241
PROCESS
To be completed under the direction of the Integrity Coordinator.
27.3.1 Internal records must be checked to determine if we have reports for:

27.3.1.1
material (e.g. pipe, flanges, fittings, etc.)
27.3.1.2
welding procedures and qualifications.
27.3.1.3
hydrotest records.
27.3.1.4
percentage of radiography completed, etc.
27.3.1.5
Quality control (QC) records.
27.3.2 The records must be assessed for compliance. Pipe, flanges & fittings that are not
compliant must be must be budgeted for replacement. All available documentation
should be submitted with the application.
27.3.3 If records are not available or incomplete, a field inspection must be completed to
confirm material. Pipeline cut-outs must be obtained for analysis.
27.3.4 The Integrity Coordinator is responsible for providing the Pipeline Coordinator with the
following:
27.3.4.1
A detailed outline of the number of dig sites determined by the following flow
chart.
27.3.4.2
Required locations (i.e., low spots, areas most susceptible to corrosion).
27.3.4.3
Sample size and how to transport (Samples should have a girth weld in the centre
and should have approximately one foot on either side).
27.3.4.4
Name of lab to send samples to for analysis.
27.3.4.5
List of lab test requirements.
27.3.4.6
May stipulate smart pigging (e.g. if the pipeline crosses a creek or river)
27.3.5 A final report is prepared by the Integrity Coordinator and forwarded to the Pipeline
Coordinator who submits it to the regulatory body (ERCB, OGC, SES etc.) for approval.
27.4
SAMPLING CRITERIA FOR SOUR SERVICE CONVERSION FLOW

CHART
Note: The following ERCB guidelines are utilized by the IC in determining the number
of dig sites.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
27.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 144 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
28.0
28.
Page
Page 145 of 241
Third Party Tie-Ins
Third Party Tie-Ins

Table of Contents
28.1
28.2
28.3
SCOPE ...................................................................................... 145

PROCESS .................................................................................. 145
TIE-IN STANDARDS ................................................................. 145
28.1
SCOPE
Third parties may be allowed to tie-in to Canadian Naturals facilities for the purpose of
utilizing our processes or pipeline facilities. Integrity risks associated with the tie-ins
must be assessed as to corrosion impact, quality of construction and the impact of a
failures on the third party line.
28.1.1 All third party tie-ins must be approved by Canadian Natural

28.1.2 The tie-ins must be done in accordance with Canadian Natural policies and guidelines.
28.1.3 All tie-ins shall meet all applicable provincial and federal regulations.
28.2
PROCESS
28.2.1 Third party tie-in requests must be submitted to Canadian Natural Production
Engineering dept for assessment.
28.2.2 Upon initial approval, Canadian Natural Joint Ventures Group (JV) notified of request.
JV forward standard application form to Third party.
28.2.3 Completed form is returned to JV c/w proposed tie-in drawing.
28.2.4 Tie-in drawing forwarded to Pipeline dept. for assessment and approval.
28.2.5 Pipeline Coordinator approves or modifies drawing to ensure compliance to CNRL and
regulatory standards.
28.2.6 Approved drawing returned to JV for final preparation of agreements to third party.
28.2.7 On completion and authorization of agreements, Canadian Natural field notified and
construction scheduled.
28.2.8 Third party completes tie-in as per Canadian Natural agreement.
28.2.9 Inspection is completed by Canadian Natural.
28.3
TIE-IN STANDARDS
28.3.1 On all proposed tie-ins the preference is to tie-in to the closest existing Canadian Natural
above ground piping.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
28.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 146 of 241
Third Party Tie-Ins
28.3.2 On HIGH OR MEDUIM RISK tie-ins (sour or other corrosive fluids, population
concerns, water crossings etc., as determined by the line with the higher risk):
28.3.2.1
Tie-in to the closest existing above ground piping if practical, or, tie-in below
ground with standard vertical tee or hot tap tee and come above ground.
28.3.2.2
Install an above ground isolation valve if not existing and;
28.3.2.3
Install an above ground check valve if not existing and;.
28.3.2.4
Install above ground pressure protection (regulators, relief valves etc.), ESDs or
other safety equipment as required by current CSA Z662 and/or provincial
regulations, if not existing.
28.3.3 On LOW RISK tie-ins (sweet shallow gas, no population concerns etc. as determined by
the line with the higher risk)
28.3.3.1
Tie-in to the closest existing above ground piping if practical using the
requirements of 28.3.2, or;
28.3.3.1.1
Option #1 (possible only if no pressure protection required): Tie-in

below ground with sweep tee with buried full-port isolation valve.
28.3.3.1.2
Option #2 (possible only if no pressure protection required): Tie-in

below ground with standard horizontal tee or hot tap tee c/w isolation
valve on top of the tee.
28.3.4 Canadian Natural Ground Disturbance Permits must be completed and proper
backfilling done (see section 29.0 & 31).
Caution Canadian Natural recognizes the risks of burying valves and

flanges. However, with the proper application of water proofing coatings such
as Densotape, corrosion and valve functionality can be maintained. Inspections
should be rigorous to ensure that due care and attention was taken in selecting
and applying the coatings.
Note: Hot tap procedure must be approved by Pipeline Integrity Group.
See Hot Tap section 11.0 in this manual.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
29.0
29.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 147 of 241
Ditching and Backfilling

Table of Contents
29.1
29.2
SCOPE ...................................................................................... 147

PROCEDURE............................................................................. 147
SCOPE
29.1
29.1.1 Backfilling and ditching shall be done in accordance to CSA Z662 and applicable
provincial pipeline acts and regulations. CNRL Ground Disturbance form must be filled
out.
29.1.2 In Alberta the ERCB must be notified (electronically) 24 hours before the start of
construction.
29.1.3 In BC, the OGC must be notified by fax, 48 hours in advance of the start of construction.
PROCEDURE
29.2
29.2.1
The contractor must advise landowners no less than 48 hours prior to moving excavation
equipment onto the ROW. It is important to ensure the ROW is properly surveyed and
marked and to maintain these markings for the duration of the work.
29.2.2 Clearing, grading and other preparatory work must be done only as far as is required for
the work, and restored to a condition afterwards that will adequately control adverse
results of ground disturbance.
29.2.3 In permafrost areas the thermal regime should not be disturbed, or disturbed as little as
possible.
29.2.4 Ditching is to be done to a depth that will accommodate a suitable bed, and sufficient
cover.
29.2.4.1
CNRL construction practice is to maintain minimum cover of 152 cm (5 feet) for

steel lines.
29.2.4.2
In unusual circumstances where 152 cm cannot be attained, the minimum cover

under Z662 is 60 cm. In Alberta, the ERCB impose a stricter limit on minimum
cover requirements and requires 80 cm as a minimum.
29.2.5 The ditch shall have an even bottom surface so the pipe will bear evenly when lowered,
without rock, frozen lumps of soil etc.
29.2.6 The ditch shall be of adequate profile to fit the pipeline without undue force on the pipe.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
29.0
29.2.6.1
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 148 of 241

In situations where the pipeline, especially bended portions, do not match the
ditch profile and cause pressure on the pipe, the ditch must be modified to better
accommodate the pipe.
29.2.7 Backfilling is to be done in manner that will not damage the pipe coating or the pipe
itself. If the pipe external coating is damaged during lowering-in or backfilling, it must be
repaired.
29.2.8 Backfilling shall be done as soon as possible after the pipe has been lowered into the
ditch. Backfill shall be done to ground level, then tamped down and levelled again.
29.2.9 All line crossings shall be underneath existing structures, and a minimum distance of
600mm must be maintained between the line being laid and other underground structures.
29.2.10 Polyethylene and fiberglass pipelines shall be laid on undisturbed or well-compacted
soil or otherwise continuously supported, and shall not be supported by blocking.
29.2.10.1
Where ledge rock, hardpan, or boulders are encountered, the trench bottom shall
be padded, using sand or compact fine-grained soils that extends a minimum of
150 mm from the pipe wall in all directions. See Section 19 for rock guard
information.
29.2.10.2
Polyethylene and fibreglass pipelines shall be installed ensuring that shear and
tensile stresses resulting from installation, backfill, thermal contractions and
external loading are within acceptable levels.
29.2.10.3
The depth of cover shall be as for steel pipelines.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
30.0
30.
Page
Page 149 of 241
Typical Drawings
Typical Drawings
30.1
SCOPE
30.1.1 Drawings are typicals only and can be modified to address site specific installations.
Drawings are online located at: I:\Facilities\PIPELINE\TYPICAL PIPELINE
30.2
RISER PIPING
30.2.1 Standard Riser (drw # typip 590 0101)

30.2.2 S Bend Riser (drw # typip 590 0102)
30.2.3 Poly to Steel Riser c/w anode specifications (drw # typip 590 0103)
30.2.4 90 o Riser (drw # typip 590 0104)
30.2.5 Tee Riser (drw # typip 590 0105)
30.2.6 Well head to Riser (drw # typip 590 0107)
30.2.7 Riser taping (drw # typip 590 0106)
30.3
PIG SENDERS/RECEIVERS
30.3.1 Pig sender with by-pass (drw # typip 590 0201)

30.3.2 Pig Sender - no by-pass (drw # typip 590 0202)
30.3.3 Vertical pig sender (drw # typip 590 0203)
30.3.4 45 o pig sender (drw # typip 590 0204)
30.4
UNDERGROUND TIE-IN
30.4.1 Straight tee (drw # typip 590 0301)

30.4.2 Y lateral (drw # typip 590 0302)
30.5
ABOVEGROUND TIE-IN
30.5.1 Straight Tee (drw # typip 590 0401)

30.5.2 Y lateral (drw # typip 590 0402)
30.6
WELL HEAD TO BUILDING PIPING
30.6.1 Typical single zone

30.6.1.1
With casing tie-in (drw # typip 5900501A)
30.6.1.2
Without casing tie-in (drw # typip 590 0501B)
30.6.2 Typical dual zone with casing tie-in (drw # typip 590 0205)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
30.0
30.7
Rev. Date
March 2009
Typical Drawings
STANDARD METER SKID
30.7.1 Vendor specific drawings available from pipeline coordinators

30.8
STANDARD SEPARATOR/METER SKID UNIT

30.9
PIPELINE WEIGHTS

30.10
PIPELINE CROSSINGS
30.10.1 Crossing with four wire test station (drw # typip 590 1201)
30.11
EXPANSION LOOPS
30.11.1 Horizontal (drw # typip 590 1301)

30.11.2 Vertical (drw # typip 590 1302)
30.12
ANCHOR BLOCKS
30.12.1 4 pile (drw # typip 590 1001)

30.12.2 6 pile (drw # typip 590 1002)
30.13
PIPELINE SUPPORT DETAILS
30.13.1 Pipeline Supports (drw # typip 590 1501)
Page
Page 150 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 151 of 241
Quality Control: Pipelines

Table of Contents
31.1
31.2
31.3
31.4
31.5
31.6
31.7
31.8
31.9
31.10
31.11
31.1
SCOPE ......................................................................................
MATERIAL TEST REPORTS .....................................................
WELDERS QUALIFICATIONS ..................................................
NDE PERFORMED ....................................................................
NDE PERSONAL QUALIFICATIONS.........................................
PRESSURE TEST INFORMATION ............................................
DRAWINGS ...............................................................................
ASBUILT DRAWINGS ...............................................................
CONSTRUCTION DATA REPORTS ...........................................
RIGHT OF WAY INFORMATION/CROSSINGS .........................
GROUND DISTURBANCE PERMITS .........................................
151
151
153
154
157
161
165
165
165
166
166
SCOPE
31.1.1 The following quality control documents must be delivered to the Pipeline Coordinators
for new pipeline construction.
31.1.2 Examples of each requirement are included for reference.
31.2
MATERIAL TEST REPORTS
31.2.1 All piping and fittings used in pipeline repairs and construction must have MTRs
submitted with package.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 152 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.3
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 153 of 241
WELDERS QUALIFICATIONS
31.3.1 If a welder is to be performing either a repair or initial construction, then he / she must
have proper certifications as a B-pressure welder (Alberta) or a pressure welder (BC &
Saskatchewan). (Further qualifications may be required depending on scope of work.)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.4
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 154 of 241
NDE PERFORMED
31.4.1 On any repair or construction must have NDE performed in order to ensure it has been
done correctly. NDE can be in the form, but not limited to, radiography, magnetic
particle inspection (MPI), or visual examination.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 155 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 156 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.5
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 157 of 241
NDE PERSONAL QUALIFICATIONS
31.5.1 All Personnel performing NDE must be qualified to do the NDE that is performed.
CNRL requires that all personnel must have a Level II CGSB certificate in the
appropriate discipline.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 158 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 159 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 160 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.6
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 161 of 241
PRESSURE TEST INFORMATION
31.6.1 With new pipeline construction either a pressure test or a pneumatic test must be
performed. When either a pressure test or a pneumatic test is performed it should have
the following forms:
31.6.1.1
A pressure test form or chart.
31.6.1.2
A pressure gauge / chart recorder calibration report.
31.6.2 Charts will be filled out as stated in CSA Z662, Section 8.6.2.4.The operating company
shall retain in its files, for the useful life of the pipeline systems, records of the pressure
tests that qualified the piping for service. Such records shall contain, where applicable, at
least the following information:
9
time and date of test;
9
pipe standards or specifications for the section tested;
9
elevation profile;
9
location of the test section and location of the pressure-measurement
points; qualification pressure (see Table 8.1), and its location and
elevation;
9
pressure-test medium used;
9
test duration;
9
pressure and temperature recording charts and logs;
9
pressure-volume charts;
9
location and cause of any leak, rupture, or other failure, and description
of any repair action taken.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 162 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 163 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 164 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
31.0
31.7
Page
Page 165 of 241
DRAWINGS
31.7.1 Pipeline construction will have typical drawings issued. Pipeline repairs may have
drawings issued. These drawings should be included in the QC documentation.
31.8
ASBUILT DRAWINGS
31.8.1 Pipeline construction as built drawings will be submitted. Pipeline repairs may have
drawings issued. X-ray weld maps will be submitted for sour pipelines. These drawings
should be included in the QC documentation.
31.9
CONSTRUCTION DATA REPORTS
31.9.1 Construction data reports are for new pipelines. These reports may include a variety of
information from summary reports to contractor logs for individual items. Some of the
items that are included in construction data reports include, but are not limited to:
31.9.1.1
General project completion reports.
31.9.1.2
Safety reports.
31.9.1.3
Daily reports.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
31.0
31.10
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 166 of 241
RIGHT OF WAY INFORMATION/CROSSINGS
31.10.1 Pipelines must have all right of way information. This information ensures that all items
have been approved of before digging starts. Pipeline crossing agreement documentation
is used when pipelines overlap, or there is potential for interference with an existing line.
Pipeline crossing agreements must be included in the QC package.
31.11
GROUND DISTURBANCE PERMITS
31.11.1 The purpose of this permit is to ensure that all precautionary measures are taken to
prevent striking and/or rupturing any pipeline, cable or utility while conducting
operations on behalf of Canadian Natural. A Canadian Natural Ground Disturbance
Permit must be filled out and retained for all ground disturbances.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
32.0
32.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 167 of 241
Quality Control: Wellsites (ASME B31.3)
Quality Control: Wellsites (ASME B31.3)

Table of Contents
32.1
SCOPE ...................................................................................... 167
32.1
SCOPE
32.1.1 The Company policy has been changed to build well-site facilities designated under the
General Specifications for ASME B31.3 Quality Control information if required.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
33.0
33.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 168 of 241
Measurement Guidelines
33.1
THE DIAGRAMS LISTED BELOW CAN BE FOUND BY ACCESSING

THIS LINKED DOCUMENT: MEASUREMENT SPECIFICATIONS
Measurement Construction -Introoduction & Scope

G4
G9
G13
G14
G15
L10
L15
Orifice Measurement Installation Guidleines

Gas Well Minimum Metering Standards
Minimum Metering Standards For Gas Deliveries Downstream Of Cnrl Sales Meter
Minimum Metring Standards For Sales Gas Meter
Sizing And Specifying Gas Meter Runs
Truck Station Mass Liquid Meter Set-Up
Meter Standards For Liquid Custody Transfer Meters
Measurement Operations - Natural Gas
G1
G2
G3
G5
G6
G7
G8
G10
G11
G12
G16
Dri-Flow Chart Changing And Zeroing Procedure

Dri-Flow Calibration- Witness Checklist
Wet Gas Orifice Measurement Criteria
Ngl Manual Sampling Techniques
Tcpl Gas Turbine Calibration -Witness Checklist
Tcpl Gas Turbine Calibration Witnessing
Inspection Of Gas Meter Tubes
Witnessing Procedure For Custody Transfer Ultrasonic Meters
Effluent Meter Test Procedure
Manual Gas Sampling Techniques
Good Chart Practices
Measurement Operations - Liquids

L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
S&W Centrifuge Procedure For Oil

S&W Centrifuge Procedure For Condensate
S&W Test Equipment List
Proving Allocation Test Meters-Witness Check List
Custody Meter Proving-Witness Check List
Density Determination Using A Thermo Hydrometer
Oil & Diluent Meter Proving-Witness Checklist
Sampling Of Pressurized Petroleum Liquids
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
33.0
L9
L11
L12
L13
L14
L16
L17
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 169 of 241
Withdraw Witnessing Checklist

Truck Scale Calibration-Witness Checklist
Truck Scale Calibration Procedure
Proving Standards For Allocation Liquid Meters
Truck Station Sampling Procedure
Karl Fisher Water Cut For Pelican Pipeline
Tank Gauging
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
34.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 170 of 241
General Specification Waiver
Pipeline Specification Waiver

Table of Contents
34.1
34.2
34.3
34.4
34.5
34.6
SCOPE ......................................................................................
DEFINITIONS ...........................................................................
REQUEST FOR DEVIATION .....................................................
APPROVAL ...............................................................................
RETROACTIVE APPROVALS ...................................................
RECORDS .................................................................................
34.1
170
170
172
172
173
173
SCOPE
34.1.1 The scope of this document is to outline the process used for deviating from any of
CNRLs specifications.
34.1.2 It is recognized that, although the CNRL specifications have been developed to cover as
broad a basis as possible, there will be situations and applications when a deviation from
specification is required.
34.1.3 In order to ensure that deviations from specifications are correctly approved and not done
in an uncontrolled manner, the procedure outlined below has to be followed.
34.2
DEFINITIONS
34.2.1 Company: when used in this specification shall mean Canadian Natural Resources Ltd.
(CNRL) or their representatives.
34.2.2 Deviations: Any proposed change to the requirements as laid out in the Specifications
34.2.3 Specification: A document specifying the requirements and process for design, ordering,
shipping, installing, construction, repairing or maintaining of equipment or another other
activity as specified by the Company.
See Specification Deviation Flow Diagram
(next page)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 171 of 241
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
34.3
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 172 of 241
REQUEST FOR DEVIATION
34.3.1 When, in a specific application, it is impossible or impractical to follow an established

Company specification, the person responsible for the design and/or construction and/or
repair has to prepare and submit a request for a deviation from specification.
34.3.2 For that purpose, the attached form (See Appendix I) may be used.
34.3.3 The justification for deviation must address the reason for requiring the deviation. If the
reason for deviation is commercial/financial, the application must be countersigned by
the area superintendent (for requests originating in the field) or the facilities manager (for
requests originating in the facility group).
34.3.4 If the deviation involves using material of lower schedule or rating than that specified,
the application must be accompanied by calculations showing the requested change will
still comply to the applicable code.
34.3.5 As part of the justification process, a risk analysis must be conducted on the proposed
change. This analysis must review safety, operations and costs advantages and offsets. At
this time, follow up actions will be identified and the persons responsible tasked with
these follow up action items.
34.3.6 The notes from the risk analysis and the list of follow up actions are to be included on the
deviation form in the appropriate locations.
34.3.7 The attached form is to be completed and submitted for approval.
34.4
APPROVAL
34.4.1 The request for deviation must be submitted to the Facilities Group for approval. A
request for a deviation will be granted for a particular project or task only.
34.4.2 The Facilities Engineer/Technologist responsible for the area or project will review the
application in terms of design suitability. The manner in which the deviation will
influence operations and/or safety and/or ease of fabrication have to be considered,
amongst others. The Facilities Engineer/Technologist must verify compliance to the
applicable Code.
34.4.3 If the Facilities Engineer/Technologist is the originator of the application for deviation, a
peer or the Facilities Manager should review the application for approval.
34.4.4 Once approved by the Facilities Engineer/Technologist, the application is routed to the
Chief Inspector for review in relation to the applicable jurisdictional regulations and
Code requirements.
34.4.5 When approved by the Facilities Engineer, the application for deviation may be
implemented in the field or shop as appropriate.
34.4.6 At this point, the Facilities Engineer will assign a number to the deviation for record
keeping purposes.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
34.5
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 173 of 241
RETROACTIVE APPROVALS
34.5.1 Applications for approval of deviations from Company specifications in retrospect will
not be entertained.
34.6
RECORDS
34.6.1 The request for deviation shall be filed in the project or equipment file, and copies placed
on the specification review file and returned to the originator.
34.6.2 The Chief Inspector will keep a record of all deviations for information purposes.
34.6.3 The Chief Inspector will review deviations to identify the possible need for revision of a
specification or for the need for a new specification.
34.6.4 The deviations will be used for revision of specifications when they are reviewed and
revised.
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 174 of 241
APPENDIX I
Specification Deviation Record
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 175 of 241
Request for Specification Deviation

Date:
Job #:
Project
(Name):
Job location:
Specification Reference
(number and paragraph):
Detail of Deviation from Specification:
Reason for Deviation from Specification:
Project
AFE:
LSD:
Specification
Revision and
Issue Date:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
Is this a once-off deviation:
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 176 of 241

Y
If NO, explain:
Benefits:
Risk Analysis: (Impact on Safety, Operations, Cost)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
34.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 177 of 241
Follow Up Actions/ Notes from Risk Analysis:
Person Requesting
Deviation:
(Name and
Signature)
Approval:
Facilities Engineer
(Name and
Signature)
Comments
Follow Up Required by:
Final Sign off:
(Name and
Signature)
Person
Authorizing
Deviation:
Is Deviation
supported:
(Yes/ No)
Facilities Engineering
Yes
No Area Foreman
Title and
Date:
Yes
Once form has been completed and signed off:

9
9
one copy is forward to the Chief inspector for information purposes; and
one copy is retained on file for future reference.
No
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
35.0
35.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 178 of 241
Abbreviations List
Abbreviations List
35.1
SCOPE
The following abbreviations are used in this manual.
A&D Coordinator CNRL Abandonment & Discontinuation Coordinator

ABSA Alberta Boilers Safety Association
API American Petroleum Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
CNRL, CNR or Canadian Natural Canadian Natural Resources Limited
COS Form CNRL Change of Status Form
CP Cathodic Protection
CSA Canadian Standards Association
ERP Emergency Response Plan
ERCB Alberta Energy Conservation Board
FCAW Flux Core Arc Welding
FIT CNRL Field Integrity Tech
GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
HAZ Heat Affected Zone
HVP - High Vapour Pressure
IC CNRL Integrity Coordinator
LPI Liquid Penetrant Inspection
LVP- Low Vapour Pressure
MOP Maximum Operating Pressure (as per licence)
MPI- Magnetic Particle Inspection
MTR Material Test Reports
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NDE Non destructive Examination
NDT Non Destructive Testing
NPS National Pipe Standard
PQR Procedure Qualification Record
PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment
QC Quality Control
ROW Right of Way
RT Radiographic Testing
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SMYS Specified Minimum Yield Strength
UT Ultrasonic Testing
WHMIS Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
WPS Welding Procedure Specification
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
36.
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 179 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Valve Descriptions (to be used to clarify line class symbols used in sections
1&2 of this manual)

36.1
CODING CONVENTION
36.1.1 Ball Valve, trunnion, ASME Class 300, sour normal low temperature service, RF, split
body, full port, gear operated
1&2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B T B S 1 C F 09
1. Valve Type
2. Mechanical Feature
3. Pressure Rating
4. Service Type
5. End Connection
6. Body Style
7. Port Size
8. Optional Suffix
More Optional Suffices may apply
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
36.0
36.2
Page
Page 180 of 241
Valve Descriptions
VALVE TYPE & MECHANICAL FEATURE
B T B S 1 C
F 09
Designator
36.3
Valve Type
BA
BT
BX
BF
Ball Valve, Floating Ball

Ball Valve, Trunnion Ball, Double Block and Bleed
Ball Valve, Special
Butterfly Valve
CB
CL
CS
CX
CW
Check Valve, Ball

Check Valve, Piston/Lift
Check Valve, Swing
Check Valve, Special
Check Valve, Dual-Plate Wafer
GA
GN
GP
GR
GT
Gate Valve, Outside Screw & Yoke Wedge Gate

Gate Valve, Non-Rising Stem Wedge Gate
Gate Valve, Outside Screw & Yoke Parallel Slide Gate
Gate Valve, Inside Screw, Rising Stem Wedge Gate
Gate Valve, Outside Screw & Yoke Through Conduit Parallel Slab Gate
GX
GY
GZ
Gate Valve, Special

Gate Valve, Outside Screw & Yoke Knife Gate
Gate Valve, Knife Gate
LC
LR
LS
LX
Globe Valve, OS&Y

Globe Valve, ISRS
Globe Valve, OS&Y Stop Check
Globe Valve, Special
ND
Needle Valves
PS
PN
PR
PL
PV
PW
PX
PY
PZ
Plug Valve, Non-Lubricated, Short Pattern

Plug Valve, Lubricated, Short Pattern
Plug Valve, Non-Lubricated, Regular Pattern
Plug Valve, Lubricated, Regular Pattern
Plug Valve, Non-Lubricated, Venturi Pattern
Plug Valve, Lubricated, Venturi Pattern
Plug Valve, Special
Plug Valve, Non-Lubricated, Round Port
Plug Valve, Lubricated, Round Port
SP
Special
PRESSURE RATING
Designator
S
A
B
C
D
Pressure Rating
Class 125
Class 150
Class 300 or 1000 CWP
Class 600 or 800 or 2000 CWP
Class 900 or 3000 CWP
B T
S 1 C F 09
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
E
F
O
36.4
36.5
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 181 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Class 1500 or 1690 or 6000 CWP
Class 2500 or 2690 or 10000 CWP
Other
SERVICE TYPE
B T B
1 C F 09
N
C
S
X
Sweet Service - Normal Temperature (-29 C to 260 C)

Sweet Service - Low Temperature (-46 C to 260 C)
Sour Service - Normal Temperature (-29 C to 260 C)
Sour Service - Low Temperature (-46 C to 260 C)
T
G
O
Steam, Boiler Feedwater, Boiler Condensate Service (Plant and Non-Boiler External Piping)
Instrument Air and Utility Air
Other
END CONNECTION
Designator
End Connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RF
RTJ
BW
RF x BW
RTJ x BW
SE (threaded)
Socket-weld
SW x SE (threaded)
Flat Faced
Other
B T B S
C F 09
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
B T B S 1
36.6.1 Ball Valve Body Style

Designator
A
B
C
D
E
O
Body Style
End-entry Body
Top-entry Body
Split Body
3-piece, Swing Out Body
All body styles (listed above)
Other
36.6.2 Check, Globe, and Steam Specialty Valve Body Style

Designator
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
V
W
X
36.6.3
Body Style
Threaded Bonnet
Welded Bonnet
Bolted Bonnet
Threaded and Seal Welded Bonnet
Pressure Seal Bonnet
Integral Bonnet
Threaded Bonnet
Welded Bonnet
Bolted Bonnet
Integral Bonnet
Threaded Bonnet
Other
Welded Bonnet
Bolted Bonnet
Integral Bonnet
Bonnetless
Wafer
Unwelded (Graphitic Seal)
Gate Valve
Designator
Page 182 of 241
Valve Descriptions
BODY STYLE
36.6
Page
Body Style
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Threaded Bonnet
Union Bonnet
Bolted Bonnet
Pressure Sealed Bonnet
Integral Bonnet
Bonnetless
Other
Feature
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle
Angle
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
Y Body
CF
09
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
36.7
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
O
36.8
Page 183 of 241
B T B S 1
CF
Body Style
MNPT x MNPT Barstock
MNPT x FNPT Barstock
FNPT x FNPT Barstock
MNPT x Tubing Barstock
Tubing x Tubing Barstock
SW Barstock
SW x FNPT Barstock
Other
PLUG VALVE
Designator
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
O
36.9
Page
Valve Descriptions
NEEDLE VALVE
Designator
Rev. Date
March 2009
Body Style
2-way
3-way
Double Block and Bleed
Standard (Bolted Gland)
Mechanically Balanced
Pressure Balanced
Dynamic Balanced
Other
BUTTERFLY VALVE
Designator
Body Style
Seal and seat/Seal
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
Wafer
Wafer
Wafer
Wafer
Wafer
Lug
Lug
Lug
Lug
Lug
Double Flanged
Double Flanged
Elastomer
Soft-seal and seated
Fire-tested
Metal to Metal
Polymer-lined
Elastomer
Fire-tested
Metal to Metal
Polymer-lined
Elastomer
N
O
P
Q
Double Flanged
Other
Double Flanged
Double Flanged
Fire-tested
Metal to Metal
Polymer-lined
09
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
36.10
N
R
F
O
36.11
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Page 184 of 241
B T B S 1 C
F 09
Port Type, Body Material and Trim Service Compatibility

Regular Port
Reduced Port
Full Port
Other
OPTIONAL SUFFICES
Designator
Page
Valve Descriptions
PORT TYPE
Designator
Rev. Date
March 2009
B T B S 1 C F
09
Suffix Characteristics
Packing and non-metallic gasket components, when applicable, to be flexible graphite
(Specify) packing and gasket.
Braided, virgin PTFE stem packing and 1/16 thick (25% glass filled) PTFE bonnet gasket.
Virgin PTFE packing and 316 SS spiral wound gasket with PTFE filler.
Packing to be spirally wrapped, soft-annealed aluminum foil (John Crane 100-AL or equal) and
gasket to be 316 SS spiral wound with graphite filler.
Glass-reinforced packing and 316 SS spiral wound gasket with PTFE filler.
Cup-and-cone (graphite die-formed) rings in combination with end rings (lattice-braided,
pitch-base carbon yarn to function as wiper & anti-extrusion rings), and (when necessary) 316
SS spacer (Garlock style #9000 EVSP Simplified Set). Bonnet gasket 316 SS spiral wound with
flexible graphite filler.
Virgin PTFE packing & titanium spiral wound gasket with PTFE filler.
Manual gear actuator in accordance with this specification
Powered gear actuator in accordance with this specification.
NPS (specify) socket-welding connection at location (specify). See Fig 1, ASME B16.34 or MSS
SP-45. Provide schedule (specify) seamless nipple with square-cut ends, (specify) length. PWHT
as specified in this specification.
Tap and plug at location (specify). See Fig 1, ASME B16.34 or MSS SP-45.
No threaded plugs permitted in body or bonnet. NOTE: Not necessary to cite for API 600 or 602
valves
If valve is in closed position, the ball bore shall be vented to the upstream side. Flow direction
must be marked on the valve.
Inconel 718 bellows.
ASTM A193, Gr.B16 bonnet studs; ASTM A194, Gr. 7 or 8M bonnet stud nuts.
ASTM A193, Gr. B8, Class 2 or B8M, Class 2 bonnet studs; ASTM A194, Gr. 8 or 8M bonnet
stud nuts.
For low temperature (to 50 degree F) H2S sour service. Bonnet, yoke, and gland bolting to be
ASTM A320, Gr. L7M studs; ASTM A194, Gr.7M with a hardness < 235 BH nuts.
For cryogenic service to (-specify) degree F. Extended stuffing box required. Hardface on gate
and seal and seat seal and seating surfaces. ASTM A320, Gr. L7 bonnet, yoke, and gland bolting;
ASTM A194 Gr. 4 nuts.
Live-loaded packing with Belleville washers.
Integral backing ring (lip extension) is not permitted. NOTE: may be invoked for extended body
valves.
Smooth face flanges (125 to 250 AARH)
If bonnet gasket is RJT, it shall have a peripheral fin to visually certify its identity. Material shall
be (specify)
Spiral wound bonnet and cover gasket.
Handles and hand-wheels for NPS 2 and smaller ball valve shall be:
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49 99
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 185 of 241
Valve Descriptions
A
Oval handwheel
B
Level handle with positive action, spring loaded, latching mechanism.
C
C type handle.
D
D type handle.
For Hydrogen service in accordance with Company specification (specify).
Furnish with a fabricated jacket (integrally cast jacket acceptable) and oversize flanges.
Lockout / Tagout device in compliance with OSHA Std. 1910.147, Control of Hazardous
Energy.
For Low temperature service to 50 degree F. Bonnet, yoke, and gland bolting shall be per
ASTM A320, Gr. L7; nuts shall be ASTM A194, Gr. 4.
No parts shall be made of Copper alloy.
No parts shall be made of Nickel alloy.
No wetted part shall be of free machining SS. NOTE: Not necessary to use for API 602 valves;
only API trim number in the 100 series permits such material.
Design pressure and temperature ranges are (specify).
Comply with NACE MR 0175; NACE Class (Specify I, II, or III) bolting.
Prepare for Oxygen service; Clean per CGA G-4.1.
PWHT of welds required in accordance with attached Company specification (specify).
Teflon inserts in seal and seat rings or wedges. Valve shall be painted (specify colour).
Type 316L SS seal and seat with hard-faced seal and seating surface.
Type 316L SS seal and seat with hard-faced seal and seating surface is acceptable.
Seal and seat shall be 300 series SS or Nitronic SS.
Seal and seat shall be Inconel 718 or 625.
Type 316 SS stem.
Comply with minimum stem diameter requirements of BSI BS 1873.
Extended stem for ball valves required to clear (specify) insulation of pipe.
Extension stem (specify) long and buffalo box shall be provided for underground installation
in accordance with accompanying Company specification (specify)
Lugholes in lug-style (single flanged) butterfly valves shall be tapped from each side.
Lugholes in lug-style (single flanged) butterfly valve shall be drilled to permit stud to pass
through.
High pressure closure test(s) per API 598 is (are) required.
Use to denote options other than described
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
36.0
Page 186 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GEAR OPERATORS (GOP)

Gear operators are recommended as per following table:
ANSI Rating
NPS
36.12
Page
150
300
600
900
1500
2500
<2
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
10
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
12
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
> 14
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
GOP
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 187 of 241
Valve Descriptions
BALL VALVES
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 150 RF BW, API 607, API 608, API 6D
Floating ball valve, end entry, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever
operator.
Floating ball valve, split body, flanged RF end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7
bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, split body, BW end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball,
reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A
194 2H nuts, lever operator.
bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operator.
194 2H nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RF end, A 216 WCB cast body or
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
Trunnion ball valve, double block & bleed, split body, BW end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105
N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607,
A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe
API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operator.
607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, end entry, flanged RF end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A
194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, split body, flanged RF end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, split body, BW end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2
forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607,
A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
BAAN1AN
to 1
BAAN1CR
2 to 3
BAAN3CR
2 to 3
BAAN1CR09
4
BAAN3CR09
4
BTAN1CF
2
BTAN3CF
2
BTAN1CR
3 to 6
BTAN3CR
3 to 6
BTAN1CR09
8 to 24
BTAN3CR09
8 to 24
BAAC1AN
to 1
BAAC1CR
2 to 3
BAAC3CR
2 to 3
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 188 of 241
Valve Descriptions
607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RF end, A 352
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS
316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, double block & bleed, split body, BW end, A 352 LCC
cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316
stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat,
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
Floating ball valve, sour service, end entry, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball,
regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A
193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, sour service, split body, flanged RF end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, sour service, split body, BW end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607,
NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear operator.
BAAC1CR09
4
BAAC3CR09
4
BTAC1CF
2
BTAC3CF
2
BTAC1CR
3 to 6
BTAC3CR
3 to 6
BTAC1CR09
8 to 24
BTAC3CR09
8 to 24
BAAS1AN
to 1
BAAS1CR
2 to 3
BAAS3CR
2 to 3
BAAS1CR09
4
BAAS3CR09
4
BTAC1CF
2
BTAC3CF
2
BTAC1CR
3 to 6
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 189 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Trunnion ball valve, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RF end, A 216 WCB
cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316
stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, BW end, A 216 WCB cast
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem,
fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, end entry, flanged RF end, A 350 LF2 forged
body, SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE
MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, split body, flanged RF end, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316
stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, split body, BW end, A 352 LCC cast body or
A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire
safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RF
end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and
seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever
operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, BW end, A
352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat,
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever
operator.
end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose
seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M
nuts, lever operator.
352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and
operator.
nuts, gear operator.
BTAC3CR
3 to 6
BTAS1CR09
8 to 24
BTAS3CR09
8 to 24
BAAX1AN
to 1
BAAX1CR
2 to 3
BAAX3CR
2 to 3
BAAX1CR09
4
BAAX3CR09
4
BTAX1CF
2
BTAX3CF
2
BTAX1CR
3 to 6
BTAX3CR
3 to 6
BTAX1CR09
8 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 190 of 241
Valve Descriptions
seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear
operator.
BTAX3CR09
8 to 24
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 300 RF BW, API 607, API 608, API 6D
Floating ball valve, end entry, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit
for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts,
lever operator.
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe
BABN1AN
to 1
BABN1CR
2 to 3
BABN3CR
2 to 3
BABN1CR09
4
BABN3CR09
4
BTBN1CF
2
BTBN3CF
2
BTBN1CR
3 to 4
BTBN3CR
3 to 4
BTBN1CR09
6 to 24
BTBN3CR09
6 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 191 of 241
Valve Descriptions
LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe
API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe
API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear operator.
BABC1AN
to 1
BABC1CR
2 to 3
BABC3CR
2 to 3
BABC1CR09
4
BABC3CR09
4
BTBC1CF
2
BTBC3CF
2
BTBC1CR
3 to 4
BTBC3CR
3 to 4
BTBC1CR09
6 to 24
BTBC3CR09
6 to 24
BABS1AN
to 1
BABS1CR
2 to 3
BABS3CR
2 to 3
BABS1CR09
4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 192 of 241
Valve Descriptions
cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem,
fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire
safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
operator.
operator.
BABS3CR09
4
BTBS1CF
2
BTBS3CF
2
BTBS1CR
3 to 4
BTBS3CR
3 to 4
BTBS1CR09
6 to 24
BTBS3CR09
6 to 24
BABX1AN
to 1
BABX1CR
2 to 3
BABX3CR
2 to 3
BABX1CR09
4
BABX3CR09
4
BTBX1CF
2
BTBX3CF
2
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 193 of 241
Valve Descriptions
operator.
operator.
BTBX1CR
3 to 4
BTBX3CR
3 to 4
BTBX1CR09
6 to 24
BTBX3CR09
6 to 24
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 600 RF BW, API 607, API 6D
Floating ball valve, end entry, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
operator.
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
BACN1AN
to 1
BACN1CR
2 to 3
BACN3CR
2 to 3
BACN1CR09
4
BACN3CR09
4
BTCN1CF
2
BTCN3CF
2
BTCN1CR
3
BTCN3CR
3
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 194 of 241
Valve Descriptions
607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
A 193 B7 bolting, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
BTCN1CR09
4 to 24
BTCN3CR09
4 to 24
BACC1AN
to 1
BACC1CR
2 to 3
BACC3CR
2 to 3
BACC1CR09
4
BACC3CR09
4
BTCC1CF
2
BTCC3CF
2
BTCC1CR
3
BTCC3CR
3
BTCC1CR09
4 to 24
BTCC3CR09
4 to 24
BACS1AN
to 1
BACS1CR
2 to 3
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 195 of 241
Valve Descriptions
cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem,
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire
safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
operator.
BACS3CR
2 to 3
BACS1CR09
4
BACS3CR09
4
BTCS1CF
2
BTCS3CF
2
BTCS1CR
3
BTCS3CR
3
BTCS1CR09
4 to 24
BTCS3CR09
4 to 24
BACX1AN
to 1
BACX1CR
2 to 3
BACX3CR
2 to 3
BACX1CR09
4
BACX3CR09
4
BTCX1CF
2
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 196 of 241
Valve Descriptions
operator.
end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal
and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
lever operator.
operator.
and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
gear operator.
operator.
BTCX3CF
2
BTCX1CR
3
BTCX3CR
3
BTCX1CR09
4 to 24
BTCX3CR09
4 to 24
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 800 (2000# CWP) SE SW SWxSE, API 607, API 608
Floating ball valve, end entry, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
operator.
Floating ball valve, end entry, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
operator.
Floating ball valve, end entry, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, end entry, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, regular
port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M
Floating ball valve, low temperature, end entry, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, regular
port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M
Floating ball valve, low temperature, end entry, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, sour service, end entry, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port,
fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M
bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
BACN6AN
to 2
BACN7AN
to 1
BACN8AN
to 1
BACC6AN
to 1
BACC7AN
to 1
BACC8AN
to 1
BACS6AN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 197 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Floating ball valve, sour service, end entry, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port,
fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M
Floating ball valve, sour service, end entry, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular
port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, end entry, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS
ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175,
A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, end entry, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged body,
SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, end entry, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged
BACS7AN
to 1
BACS8AN
to 1
BACX6AN
to 1
BACX7AN
to 1
BACX8AN
to 1
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 900 RF RTJ BW, API 607, API 6D
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem,
fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire
safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 216 WCB cast body or
safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operator.
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat
material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, double block & bleed, split body, BW end, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS
material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 352
BTDN1CR
3
BTDN3CR
3
BTDN1CR09
4 to 8
BTDN2CR09
10 to 24
BTDN3CR09
4 to 24
BTDC1CR
3
BTDC3CR
3
BTDC1CR09
4 to 8
BTDC2CR09
10 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 198 of 241
Valve Descriptions
cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material,
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever
operator.
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS
316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever
operator.
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear
operator.
Trunnion ball valve, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 216
WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat
material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts,
gear operator.
316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear
operator.
and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194
7M nuts, lever operator.
seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M
7M nuts, gear operator.
Trunnion ball valve, low temperature, sour service, double block & bleed, split body, flanged RTJ
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 1500 RF RTJ BW, API 607, API 6D
BTDC3CR09
4 to 24
BTDS1CR
3
BTDS3CR
3
BTDS1CR09
4 to 8
BTDS2CR09
10 to 24
BTDS3CR09
4 to 24
BTDX1CR
3
BTDX3CR
3
BTDX1CR09
4 to 8
BTDX2CR09
10 to 24
BTDX3CR09
4 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 199 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit
for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire
N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe
fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, flanged RF end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS
ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320
L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316
BAEN1DN
to 1
BTEN1CF
2
BTEN3CF
2
BTEN1CR
3
BTEN3CR
3
BTEN1CR09
4 to 8
BTEN2CR09
10 to 16
BTEN3CR09
4 to 16
BAEC1DN
to 1
BTEC1CF
2
BTEC3CF
2
BTEC1CR
3
BTEC3CR
3
BTEC1CR09
4 to 8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 200 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, flanged RF end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball,
regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE
MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS
operator.
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever
operator.
operator.
SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear
operator.
gear operator.
operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, flanged RF end, A 350 LF2
forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe
API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
BTEC2CR09
10 to 16
BTEC3CR09
4 to 16
BAES1DN
to 1
BTES1CF
2
BTES3CF
2
BTES1CR
3
BTES3CR
3
BTES1CR09
4 to 8
BTES2CR09
10 to 16
BTES3CR09
4 to 16
BAEX1DN
to 1
BTEX1CF
2
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 201 of 241
Valve Descriptions
352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat
material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
lever operator.
7M nuts, lever operator.
BTEX3CF
2
BTEX1CR
3
BTEX3CR
3
BTEX1CR09
4 to 8
BTEX2CR09
10 to 16
BTEX3CR09
4 to 16
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 1500 (4000# CWP) SE SW SWxSE, API 607,
API 6D
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A 320 L7
bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
BAEN6DN
to 1
BAEN7DN
to 1
BAEN8DN
to 1
BAEC6DN
to 1
BAEC7DN
to 1
BAEC8DN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 202 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular
port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body,
SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607,
NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged
body, SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API
607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged
BAES6DN
to 1
BAES7DN
to 1
BAES8DN
to 1
BAEX6DN
to 1
BAEX7DN
to 1
BAEX8DN
to 1
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 2500 RTJ BW, API 607, API 6D
Floating ball valve, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, A
193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, lever operator.
A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire
N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe
Floating ball valve, low temperature, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
LF2 forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire
safe API 607, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316
BAFN2CR
to 1
BTFN2CF
2
BTFN3CF
2
BTFN2CR09
3 to 12
BTFN3CR09
3 to 12
BAFC2CR
to 1
BTFC2CF
2
BTFC3CF
2
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 203 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Floating ball valve, sour service, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, SS ball, reduced port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe
API 607, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, lever operator.
WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat
lever operator.
body or A 105 N forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316
gear operator.
operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, split body, flanged RTJ end, A 352 LCC cast
316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball, full port, fit for purpose seal and seat
material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
lever operator.
BTFC2CR09
3 to 12
BTFC3CR09
3 to 12
BAFS2CR
to 1
BTFS2CF
2
BTFS3CF
2
BTFS2CR09
3 to 12
BTFS3CR09
3 to 12
BAFX2CR
to 1
BTFX2CF
2
BTFX3CF
2
BTFX2CR09
3 to 12
BTFX3CR09
3 to 12
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 204 of 241
Valve Descriptions
BALL VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 2500 (6000# CWP) SE SW SWxSE, API 607,
API 6D
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit for
Floating ball valve, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular port, fit
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, low temperature, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SW end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball, regular
Floating ball valve, sour service, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 105 N forged body, SS ball,
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SE end, A 350 LF2 forged body,
SS ball, regular port, fit for purpose seal and seat material, SS 316 stem, fire safe API 607,
NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, lever operator.
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SW end, A 350 LF2 forged
Floating ball valve, low temperature, sour service, 3-piece body, SWxSE end, A 350 LF2 forged
BAFN6DN
to 1
BAFN7DN
to 1
BAFN8DN
to 1
BAFC6DN
to 1
BAFC7DN
to 1
BAFC8DN
to 1
BAFS6DN
to 1
BAFS7DN
to 1
BAFS8DN
to 1
BAFX6DN
to 1
BAFX7DN
to 1
BAFX8DN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 205 of 241
Valve Descriptions
CHECK VALVES
CHECK VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 150 RF BW, API 600, API 602, API 6D
Check piston type valve, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular
port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, BW end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check piston type valve, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body or
A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, BW end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check piston type valve, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim #
10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check swing type valve, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A
105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check swing type valve, sour service, BW end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check piston type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2
forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC
cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting,
A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, BW end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A
194 7M nuts
Check piston valve, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8,
regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A
105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, steam service, BW end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
CLAN1CN
to 1
CSAN1CN
2 to 24
CSAN3CN
2 to 24
CLAC1CN
to 1
CSAC1CN
2 to 24
CSAC3CN
2 to 24
CLAS1CN
to 1
CSAS1CN
2 to 24
CSAS3CN
2 to 24
CLAX1CN
to 1
CSAX1CN
2 to 24
CSAX3CN
2 to 24
CLAT1CN
to 1
CSAT1CN
2 to 24
CSAT3CN
2 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 206 of 241
Valve Descriptions
CLBN1CN
to 1
CSBN1CN
2 to 24
CSBN3CN
2 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 207 of 241
Valve Descriptions
A 194 7M nuts
194 7M nuts
CLBC1CN
to 1
CSBC1CN
2 to 24
CSBC3CN
2 to 24
CLBS1CN
to 1
CSBS1CN
2 to 24
CSBS3CN
2 to 24
CLBX1CN
to 1
CSBX1CN
2 to 24
CSBX3CN
2 to 24
CLBT1CN
to 1
CSBT1CN
2 to 24
CSBT3CN
2 to 24
CLCN1CN
to 1
CSCN1CN
2 to 24
CSCN3CN
2 to 24
CLCC1CN
to 1
CSCC1CN
2 to 24
CSCC3CN
2 to 24
CLCS1CN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 208 of 241
Valve Descriptions
CSCS1CN
2 to 24
A 194 7M nuts
194 7M nuts
CSCS3CN
2 to 24
CLCX1CN
to 1
CSCX1CN
2 to 24
CSCX3CN
2 to 24
CLCT1CN
to 1
CSCT1CN
2 to 24
CSCT3CN
2 to 24
CHECK VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 800 SE SW SWxSE, API 602, API 6D
Check piston valve, SE end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7
bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check piston valve, SW end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7
Check piston valve, low temperature, SE end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check piston valve, low temperature, SW end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Check piston valve, sour service, SE end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular
port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check piston valve, sour service, SW end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Check piston valve, steam service, SW end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular
CLCN6CN
to 2
CLCN7CN
to 1
CLCC6CN
to 1
CLCC7CN
to 1
CLCS6CN
to 1
CLCS7CN
to 1
CLCX6CN
to 1
CLCX7CN
to 1
CLCT7CN
to 1
CHECK VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 900 RF RTJ BW, API 600, API 602, API 6D
CSDN1CN
3 to 8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 209 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Check swing type valve, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
CSDN2CN
10 to 24
Check swing type valve, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body or
Check swing type valve, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A
A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC
A 194 7M nuts
194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RF end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body
or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast
body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, steam service, BW end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A
CSDN3CN
3 to 24
CSDC1CN
3 to 8
CSDC2CN
10 to 24
CSDC3CN
3 to 24
CSDS1CN
3 to 8
CSDS2CN
10 to 24
CSDS3CN
3 to 24
CSDX1CN
3 to 8
CSDX2CN
10 to 24
CSDX3CN
3 to 24
CSDT1EN
3 to 8
CSDT2EN
10 to 24
CSDT3EN
3 to 24
CHECK VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 1500 RF RTJ BW, API 600, API 602, API 6D
Check piston type valve, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port,
A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check swing type valve, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
Check swing type valve, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body or A
350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
CLEN1CN
to 1
CSEN1CN
2 to 8
CSEN2CN
10 to 24
CSEN3CN
2 to 24
CLEC1CN
to 1
CSEC1CN
2 to 8
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 210 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Check swing type valve, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body or
CSEC2CN
10 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 211 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Check swing type valve, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105
N forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check swing type valve, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A
A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC
A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, BW end, bolted cover, A 352 LCC cast body
or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M
nuts
CSEC3CN
2 to 24
CLES1CN
to 1
CSES1CN
2 to 8
CSES2CN
10 to 24
CSES3CN
2 to 24
CLEX1CN
to 1
Check piston valve, steam service, flanged RF end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RF end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body
CLET1XN
to 1
CSET1EN
2 to 8
CSET2EN
10 to 24
CSET3EN
2 to 24
CSEX1CN
2 to 8
CSEX2CN
10 to 24
CSEX3CN
2 to 24
Check piston valve, SE end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7
Check piston valve, SW end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 193 B7
Check piston valve, low temperature, SE end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Check piston valve, low temperature, SW end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Check piston valve, sour service, SE end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular
Check piston valve, sour service, SW end, bolted cover, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular
CLEN6CN
to 1
CLEN7CN
to 1
CLEC6CN
to 1
CLEC7CN
to 1
CLES6CN
to 1
CLES7CN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 212 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted cover, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Check piston valve, steam service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
CLEX6CN
to 1
CLEX7CN
to 1
CLET7XN
to 1
CHECK VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 2500 RTJ BW, API 600, API 602, API 6D
Check piston type valve, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
Check swing type valve, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
Check swing type valve, BW end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
Check piston type valve, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y
body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, BW end, pressure seal cover, A 352 LCC cast body or A
350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check piston type valve, sour service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body,
A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM
nuts
Check swing type valve, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body
or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM
nuts
Check swing type valve, sour service, BW end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105
N forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Check piston type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal)
cover, Y body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M
bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 352
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M
Check swing type valve, low temperature, sour service, BW end, pressure seal cover, A 352 LCC
A 194 7M nuts
Check piston valve, steam service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
Check swing type valve, steam service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, A 216 WCB cast body
CLFN2XN
to 1
CSFN2EN
2 to 24
CSFN3EN
2 to 24
CLFC2XN
to 1
CSFC2EN
2 to 24
CSFC3EN
2 to 24
CLFS2XN
to 1
CSFS2EN
2 to 24
CSFS3EN
2 to 24
CLFX2XN
to 1
CSFX2EN
2 to 24
CSFX3EN
2 to 24
CLFT2XN
to 1
CSFT2EN
2 to 24
CSFT3EN
2 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 213 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Check piston valve, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N forged body, Trim
# 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check piston valve, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N forged body, Trim
# 8, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Check piston valve, low temperature, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 350
Check piston valve, low temperature, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 350
Check piston valve, sour service, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
Check piston valve, sour service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y
body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194
7M nuts
Check piston valve, low temperature, sour service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y
body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, regular port, NACE MR0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194
7M nuts
Check piston valve, steam service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
CLFN6XN
to 1
CLFN7XN
to 1
CLFC6XN
to 1
CLFC7XN
to 1
CLFS6XN
to 1
CLFS7XN
to 1
CLFX6XN
to 1
CLFX7XN
to 1
CLFT7XN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 214 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GATE VALVES
GATE VALVES - ASME B 16.34, Class 150 RF BW, API 600, API 602
Gate valve OS&Y, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, API Trim #
8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
GAAN1CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H
nuts
GAAN1CN
2 to 12
Gate valve OS&Y, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, flexible
wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
GAAN3CN
2 to 12
nuts, gear operated
GAAN1CN09
14 to 24
wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear
operated
GAAN3CN09
14 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAAC1CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7
GAAC1CN
2 to 12
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2
forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7
GAAC3CN
2 to 12
bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAAC1CN09
14 to 24
GAAC3CN09
14 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A
194 2HM nuts
GAAS1CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR
0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
GAAS1CN
2 to 12
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 215 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A
193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
GAAS3CN
2 to 12
0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts gear operator
GAAS1CN09
14 to 24
193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts gear operator
GAAS3CN09
14 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
body, solid wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320
L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAAX1CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular
port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAAX1CN
2 to 12
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or
A 350 LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port,
NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAAX3CN
2 to 12
port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAAX1CN09
14 to 24
NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAAX3CN09
14 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid
GAAT1CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GAAT1CN
2 to 12
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A
194 2H nuts
GAAT3CN
2 to 12
bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operated
GAAT1CN09
14 to 24
194 2H nuts, gear operated
GAAT3CN09
14 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 216 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GABN1CN
to 1
nuts
GABN1CN
2 to 10
GABN3CN
2 to 10
nuts, gear operated
GABN1CN09
12 to 24
operated
GABN3CN09
12 to 24
GABC1CN
to 1
GABC1CN
2 to 10
GABC3CN
2 to 10
GABC1CN09
12 to 24
GABC3CN09
12 to 24
194 2HM nuts
GABS1CN
to 1
GABS1CN
2 to 10
GABS3CN
2 to 10
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 217 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GABS1CN09
12 to 24
GABS3CN09
12 to 24
GABX1CN
to 1
GABX1CN
2 to 10
GABX3CN
2 to 10
GABX1CN09
12 to 24
GABX3CN09
12 to 24
GABT1CN
to 1
GABT1CN
2 to 10
194 2H nuts
GABT3CN
2 to 10
GABT1CN09
12 to 24
GABT3CN09
12 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 218 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GACN1CN
to 1
nuts
GACN1CN
2 to 6
GACN3CN
2 to 6
nuts, gear operated
GACN1CN09
8 to 24
operated
GACN3CN09
8 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, r A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
GACC1CN
to 1
GACC1CN
2 to 6
GACC3CN
2 to 6
GACC1CN09
8 to 24
GACC3CN09
8 to 24
194 2HM nuts
GACS1CN
to 1
GACS1CN
2 to 6
GACS3CN
2 to 6
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 219 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GACS1CN09
8 to 24
GACS3CN09
8 to 24
GACX1CN
to 1
GACX1CN
2 to 6
GACX3CN
2 to 6
GACX1CN09
8 to 24
GACX3CN09
8 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, or A 105 N forged body, solid
wedge, API Trim # 8, solid graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
GACT1CN
to 1
GACT1CN
2 to 6
194 2H nuts
GACT3CN
2 to 6
GACT1CN09
8 to 24
GACT3CN09
8 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 220 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GATE VALVES - ASME B 16.34, Class 800 SE SW SWxSE, API 602

Gate valve OS&Y, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non asbestos
packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GACN6CN
to 2
Gate valve OS&Y, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
asbestos packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GACN7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GACN8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, bolted bonnet A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
trim # 8, non asbestos packing, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, regular port
GACC6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
GACC7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
wedge, trim # 8, non asbestos packing, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, regular port
GACC8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
#10, non asbestos packing, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, regular port
GACS6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
GACS7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
trim #10, non asbestos packing, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, regular
port
GACS8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
solid wedge, trim #10, non asbestos packing, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
regular port
GACX6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
regular port
GACX7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
body, solid wedge, trim #10, non asbestos packing, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194
7M nuts, regular port
GACX8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim #
8, flexible graphite packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GACT7CN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 221 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GACT8CN
to 1
GATE VALVES - ASME B 16.34, Class 900 RF RTJ BW, API 600, API 602
nuts
GADN1CN
3 to 4
GADN3CN
3 to 4
nuts, gear operated
GADN1CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, flanged RTJ end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
nuts, gear operated
GADN2CN09
10 to 24
operated
GADN3CN09
6 to 24
GADC1CN
3 to 4
GADC3CN
3 to 4
GADC1CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A
350 LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320
L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GADC2CN09
10 to 24
GADC3CN09
6 to 24
GADS1CN
3 to 4
GADS3CN
3 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 222 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GADS1CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
GADS2CN09
10 to 24
GADS3CN09
6 to 24
GADX1CN
3 to 4
GADX3CN
3 to 4
GADX1CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast
GADX2CN09
10 to 24
GADX3CN09
6 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A
105 N forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GADT1EN
3 to 4
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
GADT3EN
3 to 4
105 N forged body, parallel slide, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GPDT1EN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or
A 105 N forged body, parallel slide, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GPDT2EN09
10 to 24
forged body, parallel slide, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting,
A 194 2H nuts, gear operated
GPDT3EN09
6 to 24
GATE VALVES - ASME B 16.34, Class 1500 RF RTJ BW, API 600, API 602
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 223 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GAEN1CN
to 1
nuts
GAEN1CN
2 to 4
GAEN3CN
2 to 4
nuts, gear operated
GAEN1CN09
6 to 8
operated
GAEN3CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
GAEN2EN09
10 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
nuts, gear operated
GAEN3EN09
10 to 24
GAEC1CN
to 1
GAEC1CN
2 to 4
GAEC3CN
2 to 4
GAEC1CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
GAEC3CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body
or A 350 LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A
320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAEC2EN09
10 to 24
GAEC3EN09
10 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 224 of 241
Valve Descriptions
194 2HM nuts
GAES1CN
to 1
GAES1CN
2 to 4
GAES3CN
2 to 4
GAES1CN09
6 to 8
GAES3CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A
105 N forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE
MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts gear operator
GAES2EN09
10 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
GAES3EN09
10 to 24
GAEX1CN
to 1
GAEX1CN
2 to 4
GAEX3CN
2 to 4
GAEX1CN09
6 to 8
GAEX3CN09
6 to 8
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite
packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAEX2EN09
10 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast
GAEX3EN09
10 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 225 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GAET1CN
to 1
105 N forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GAET1EN
2 to 4
GAET3EN
2 to 4
105 N forged body, parallel slide, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
GPET1EN09
6 to 8
GPET2EN09
10 to 24
GPET3EN09
6 to 24

Gate valve OS&Y, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non asbestos
packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GAEN6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GAEN7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GAEN8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, bolted bonnet A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
GAEC6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
GAEC7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
GAEC8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
GAES6CN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 226 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
GAES7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
port
GAES8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
regular port
GAEX6CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
regular port
GAEX7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
GAEX8CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim #
8, flexible graphite packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GAET7CN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
GAET8CN
to 1
GATE VALVES - ASME B 16.34, Class 2500 RTJ BW, API 600, API 602
Gate valve OS&Y, flanged RTJ end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, API Trim #
GAFN2BN
to 1
194 2H nuts
GAFN2EN
2 to 3
nuts
GAFN3EN
2 to 3
GAFN2EN09
4 to 24
nuts, gear operated
GAFN3EN09
4 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
GAFC2BN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 227 of 241
Valve Descriptions
320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAFC2EN
2 to 3
GAFC3EN
2 to 3
320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAFC2EN09
4 to 24
GAFC3EN09
4 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RTJ end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid
wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M
bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
GAFS2BN
to 1
MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
GAFS2EN
2 to 3
GAFS3EN
2 to 3
MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts gear operator
GAFS2EN09
4 to 24
GAFS3EN09
4 to 24
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2
forged body, solid wedge, API Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175,
A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAFX2BN
to 1
packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
GAFX2EN
2 to 3
GAFX3EN
2 to 3
packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operator
GAFX2EN09
4 to 24
GAFX3EN09
4 to 24
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 228 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RTJ end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid
GAFT2BN
to 1
A 105 N forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193
B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
GAFT2EN
2 to 3
GAFT3EN
2 to 3
A 105 N forged body, flexible wedge, API Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193
B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, gear operated
GAFT2EN09
4
GAFT3EN09
4
GPFT2EN09
6 to 24
GPFT3EN09
6 to 24

Gate valve OS&Y, SE end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GAFN6BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, SW end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GAFN7BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim # 8, non
GAFN8BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
GAFC6BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid wedge,
GAFC7BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, solid
GAFC8BN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 229 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
GAFS6BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
GAFS7BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
port
GAFS8BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
regular port
GAFX6BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
regular port
GAFX7BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, welded bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
GAFX8BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge, trim
# 8, flexible graphite packing, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts, regular port
GAFT7BN
to 1
Gate valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, welded bonnet, A 105 N forged body, solid wedge,
GAFT8BN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 230 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GLOBE VALVES
GLOBE VALVE - ASME 16.34 Class 150 RF BW, API 600, API 602
Globe valve OS&Y, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible
graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, Trim #
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim
# 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A
350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350 LF2
forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts,
gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10,
flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged
body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A
194 2HM nuts, gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2
forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast
body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR
0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or
A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320
L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8,
flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105
N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, BW end, bolted bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
LCAN1CN
to 1
LCAN1CN
2 to 4
LCAN3CN
2 to 4
LCAC1CN
to 1
LCAC1CN
2 to 4
LCAC3CN
2 to 4
LCAS1CN
to 1
LCAS1CN
2 to 4
LCAS3CN
2 to 4
LCAX1CN
to 1
LCAX1CN
2 to 4
LCAX3CN
2 to 4
LCAT1CN
to 1
LCAT1CN
2 to 4
LCAT3CN
2 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
36.0
Page
Page 231 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Globe Valve - ASME 16.34 Class 300 RF BW, API 600, API 602
nuts
gear operated
LCBN1CN
to 1
LCBN1CN
2 to 4
LCBN3CN
2 to 4
LCBC1CN
to 1
LCBC1CN
2 to 4
LCBC3CN
2 to 4
LCBS1CN
to 1
LCBS1CN
2 to 4
LCBS3CN
2 to 4
LCBX1CN
to 1
LCBX1CN
2 to 4
LCBX3CN
2 to 4
LCBT1CN
to 1
LCBT1CN
2 to 4
LCBT3CN
2 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 232 of 241
Valve Descriptions
nuts
gear operated
LCCN1CN
to 1
LCCN1CN
2 to 4
LCCN3CN
2 to 4
LCCC1CN
to 1
LCCC1CN
2 to 4
LCCC3CN
2 to 4
LCCS1CN
to 1
LCCS1CN
2 to 4
LCCS3CN
2 to 4
LCCX1CN
to 1
LCCX1CN
2 to 4
LCCX3CN
2 to 4
LCCT1CN
to 1
LCCT1CN
2 to 4
LCCT3CN
2 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 233 of 241
Valve Descriptions
GLOBE VALVE - ASME 16.34 Class 800 SE SW SWxSE, API 602

Globe valve OS&Y, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
Globe valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim #
8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible
graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A
194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8,
LCCN6CN
to 2
LCCN7CN
to 1
LCCN8CN
to 1
LCCC6CN
to 1
LCCC7CN
to 1
LCCC8CN
to 1
LCCS6CN
to 1
LCCS7CN
to 1
LCCS8CN
to 1
LCCX6CN
to 1
LCCX7CN
to 1
LCCX8CN
to 1
LCCT7CN
to 1
LCCT8CN
to 1
LCDN1CN
3 to 4
LCDN3CN
3 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 234 of 241
Valve Descriptions
nuts
gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A
193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, BW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 216
WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, pressure seal cover, Y body, A 216 WCB cast
body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A
194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, BW end, pressure seal cover, Y body, A 216 WCB cast body
or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194
2H nuts
LCDC1CN
3 to 4
LCDC3CN
3 to 4
LCDS1CN
3 to 4
LCDS3CN
3 to 4
LCDX1CN
3 to 4
LCDX3CN
3 to 4
LCDT1XN
3
LCDT3XN
3
LCDT1SN
4
LCDT3SN
4
nuts
LCEN1CN
to 1
LCEN1CN
2 to 4
LCEN3CN
2 to 4
LCEC1CN
to 1
LCEC1CN
2 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 235 of 241
Valve Descriptions
gear operated
105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RF end, pressure seal cover, Y body, A 216 WCB cast
body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A
194 2H nuts
2H nuts
LCEC3CN
2 to 4
LCES1CN
to 1
LCES1CN
2 to 4
LCES3CN
2 to 4
LCEX1CN
to 1
LCEX1CN
2 to 4
LCEX3CN
2 to 4
LCET1XN
to 1
LCET1XN
2 to 3
LCET3XN
2 to 3
LCET1SN
4
LCET3SN
4

Globe valve OS&Y, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
Globe valve OS&Y, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
Globe valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite
LCEN6CN
to 1
LCEN7CN
to 1
LCEN8CN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 236 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim #
8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged body,
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, bolted bonnet, A 350 LF2 forged
body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A
194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105
LCEC6CN
to 1
LCEC7CN
to 1
LCEC8CN
to 1
LCES6CN
to 1
LCES7CN
to 1
LCES8CN
to 1
LCEX6CN
to 1
LCEX7CN
to 1
LCEX8CN
to 1
LCET7XN
to 1
LCET8XN
to 1
GLOBE VALVE - ASME 16.34 Class 2500 RTJ BW, API 600, API 602
Globe valve OS&Y, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N forged
body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
Globe valve OS&Y, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N forged body,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body,
A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194
7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body
or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A
194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast body or A 350
LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M
nuts, gear operated
LCFN2XN
to 1
LCFN2EN
2 to 4
LCFN3EN
2 to 4
LCFC2XN
to 1
LCFC2EN
2 to 4
LCFC3EN
2 to 4
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 237 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or
A 105 N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193
B7M bolting, A 194 2HM nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 216 WCB cast body or A 105 N
bolting, A 194 2HM nuts, gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal)
cover, Y body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE
MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352
LCC cast body or A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE
MR 0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, BW end, pressure seal bonnet, A 352 LCC cast
0175, A 320 L7M bolting, A 194 7M nuts, gear operated
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RTJ end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, flanged RTJ end, pressure seal cover, Y body, A 216 WCB
cast body or A 105 N forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7
2H nuts
LCFS2XN
to 1
LCFS2EN
2 to 4
LCFS3EN
2 to 4
LCFX2XN
to 1
LCFX2EN
2 to 4
LCFX3EN
2 to 4
LCFT2XN
to 1
LCFT2XN
2 to 3
LCFT3XN
2 to 3
LCFT2SN
4
LCFT3SN
4

Globe valve OS&Y, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105 N forged body,
Globe valve OS&Y, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105 N forged body,
Globe valve OS&Y, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105 N forged
body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 193 B7 bolting, A 194 2H nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 350
LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
LCFN6XN
to 1
LCFN7XN
to 1
LCFN8XN
to 1
LCFC6XN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 238 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 350
LF2 forged body, Trim # 8, flexible graphite packing, regular port, A 320 L7 bolting, A 194 7M nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A
nuts
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105 N
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105 N
Globe valve OS&Y, sour service, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y body, A 105
N forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175, A 193 B7M
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y
body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet, Y
body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR 0175,
Globe valve OS&Y, low temperature, sour service, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) bonnet,
Y body, A 350 LF2 forged body, Trim # 10, flexible graphite packing, regular port, NACE MR
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SW end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105 N
Globe valve OS&Y, steam service, SWxSE end, unwelded (graphitic seal) cover, Y body, A 105
LCFC7XN
to 1
LCFC8XN
to 1
LCFS6XN
to 1
LCFS7XN
to 1
LCFS8XN
to 1
LCFX6XN
to 1
LCFX7XN
to 1
LCFX8XN
to 1
LCFT7XN
to 1
LCFT8XN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 239 of 241
Valve Descriptions
NEEDLE VALVES
NEEDLE VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 1500 (6000# CWP), SE SW

Needle valve, low temperature, sour service, MxF SE end, threaded bonnet, fit for purpose
packing, A 479 316 SS body, integral metal to metal seal and seat, normal bore, NACE MR 0175
Needle valve, low temperature, sour service, FxF SE end, threaded bonnet, fit for purpose
Needle valve, steam service, SW end, threaded bonnet, graphoil packing, A 479 316 SS body,
integral metal to metal seal and seat, normal bore, NACE MR 0175
NDEX6BN
to 1
NDEX6CN
to 1
NDET7FN
to 1
NEEDLE VALVES - ASME B16.34, Class 2500 (10000# CWP), SE SW

Needle valve, low temperature, sour service, MxF SE end, threaded bonnet, fit for purpose
Needle valve, low temperature, sour service, FxF SE end, threaded bonnet, fit for purpose
Needle valve, steam service, SW end, threaded bonnet, graphoil packing, A 479 316 SS body,
integral metal to metal seal and seat, normal bore, NACE MR 0175
NDFX6BN
to 1
NDFX6CN
to 1
NDFT7FN
to 1
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
Rev. Date
March 2009
36.0
Page
Page 240 of 241
Valve Descriptions
TRIM NUMBER MATERIALS AND HARDNESS AS PER API 600

Trim Nominal Trim Seal and seat Seal and seat
Surface
No
Surface
Material
Hardness
Type (b)
(HB)
minimum (a)
Seal and seat Surface Typical Specification

(grade)
Cast
Forged
Welded (m)
F6
c)
13 Cr
304
d)
18Cr - 8Ni
ASTM A217
(CA15)
ASTM A351
(CF8)
F310
d)
25Cr - 20Ni
NA
ASTM A182
(F6a)
ASTM A182
(F304)
ASTM A182
(F310)
Hard F6
750 (e)
Hard 13Cr
NA
f)
Hardfaced
350 (e)
Co-Cr A (g)
NA
NA
5A
Hardfaced
F6 and
Cu-Ni
351 (e)
Ni-Cr
250 (I)
13Cr
NA
ASTM A217
(CA15)
NA
ASTM A182
(F6a)
h)
AWS A5.9
ER410
175 (I)
Cu-Ni
NA
ASTM A217
(CA15)
k)
ASTM A182
(F6a)
NA
AWS A5.9
ER410
NA
ASTM A217
(CA15)
f)
ASTM A182
(F6a)
NA
ASTM A182
(F6a)
NA
AWS A5.9
ER410
AWS A5.13 E
or R CoCrA
AWS A5.9
ER410
NA
h)
F6 and
7
Hard F6
F6 and
8
Hardfaced
8A
F6 and
Hardfaced
250(I)
13Cr
750(i)
Hard 13Cr
250(i)
13Cr
350 (i)
Co-Cr A (g)
250(i)
13Cr
NA
ASTM A217
(CA15)
350(i)
Ni-Cr
NA
AWS A5.9
ER410
AWS A5.9
ER308
AWS A5.9
ER310
Stem/Bushing
Material
Type(b)
13 Cr
18Cr 8Ni
25Cr 20Ni
NA
13Cr
AWS A5.13E or
R CoCrA
13Cr
13Cr
13Cr
NA
13Cr
NA
13Cr
NA
13Cr
Typical
Specification
ASTM A276T410 or T420
ASTM A276T304
ASTM A276T310
ASTM A276T410 orT420
Backseal
Stem
Hardness and seat
Bushing
(HB)
Hardness
(HB)
200 min;
275 max 250 min
d)
d)
d)
200 min;
275 max
200 min;
275 max
200 min;
275 max
200 min;
275 max
d)
250 min
250 min
250 min
250 min
NA
NA
200 min;
275 max
NA
NA
NA
200 min;
275 max
NA
NA
200 min;
275 max
250 min
250 min
NA
250 min
NA
Monel
d)
Ni-Cu Alloy
10
316
d)
18Cr-8Ni
11
Monel and
Hardfaced
d)
Ni-Cu Alloy
NA
MFG. Standard
NA
NA
Ni-Cu
Alloy
18Cr8Ni
Ni-Cu
Alloy
350(i)
Trim 5 or 5A
Trim 5 or 5A
AWS A5.9
ER316
NA
18Cr8Ni
NA
ASTM A276T316
NA
18Cr-8Ni
NA
ASTM A182
(F316)
NA
d)
NA
ASTM
A351(CF8M)
d)
d)
350(i)
Trim 5 or 5A
NA
NA
19Cr29Ni
19Cr29Ni
NA
NA
NA
ASTM B473
Trim 5 or 5A
AWS A5.9
ER320
AWS A5.9
ER320
ASTM B473
d)
d)
ASTM B473
d)
d)
Trim 5 or 5A
AWS A5.13 E
or R CoCrA
AWS A5.13 or
R CoCrA
AWS A5.13 or
R CoCrA
AWS A5.13 or
R CoCrA
NA
18Cr8Ni
18Cr8Ni
18Cr10Ni
19Cr29Ni
NA
ASTM A276T304
ASTM A276T316
ASTM A276T347
NA
NA
d)
n)
d)
n)
d)
n)
ASTM B473
d)
n)
12
316 and
Hardfaced
NA
MFG. Standard
ASTM
ASTM A182
A351(CF8M)
(F316)
13
Alloy 320
d)
19Cr-29Ni
14
Alloy 20 and
Hardfaced
d)
19Cr-29Ni
NA
ASTM
A351(CN7M)
ASTM A351
(CN7M)
350(i)
Trim 5 or 5A
NA
NA
ASTM B473
15
Hardware
350(e)
Co-Cr A (g)
NA
NA
16
Hardfaced
350 (e)
Co-Cr A (g)
NA
NA
17
Hardware
350 (e)
Co-Cr A (g)
NA
NA
18
Hardfaced
350(e)
Co-Cr A (g)
NA
NA
NA
AWS A5.9
ER316
NA
NA
NA
MFG. Standard
ASTM A276T316
d)
d)
d)
d)
MFG. Standard
d)
d)
Rev.
3.0
Section Name
Section Number
36.0
Rev. Date
March 2009
Page
Page 241 of 241
Valve Descriptions
Notes
Cr = Chromium; Ni = Nickel: Co = Cobalt: Cu = Copper; NA = not applicable;
b) = Free-machine grades of 13 Cr are prohibited;
d) = Manufacturer's standard hardness
f) = Case hardened by nitriding to a thickness of 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) min;
g) = This classification includes such trademarked materials as Stellite 6, Stoody 6, and Wallex 6;
h) = Manufacturer's standard hardfacing with a max iron content of 25%;
i) = Hardness differential between body and gate seal and seat surfaces shall be the manufacturer's standard;
k) = Manufacturer's standard with 30Ni minimum;
n) = Per manufacturer's standard if not hardfaced, 250 HB minimum if hardfaced.

A2K5D8 - CNRL Pipeline Specifications 2009

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

A2K5D8 - CNRL Pipeline Specifications 2009

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CANADIAN NATURAL RESOURCES

PIPELINE SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL

Revision Number: 3.0

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

1 . Introduction and Line Classes Pipelines

LEGISLATION, REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

The relevant Provincial Pipeline Act and Regulations and Directives, as

CSA Z662-07 Oil and Gas Pipeline Systems

CSA Z245.1 Steel Pipe

CSA Z245.11 Steel Fittings

CSA Z245.12 Steel Flanges

CSA Z245.15 Steel Valves

CNRL Facilities Specifications as applicable

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

ASME Standard B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

API standards and recommended practises as applicable

ASTM Standards as applicable

NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 latest edition, Petroleum and Natural Gas

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

Usual operational conditions do not include more severe temporary conditions,

Emergency Shutdown Devices

If an emergency shutdown device or any part of it fails on a pipeline in sour

Other Loading and Dynamic Effects

The stress requirements in this Specification are specifically limited to design

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

The nominal outside diameter shall be within the tolerance specified in

The minus (-) wall thickness tolerance shall be within 5% of the

The weld preparation tolerance shall be as per CSA Z245.1 Clause

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

PIPELINE SERVICE CLASSES

Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons,

Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons,

Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons,

Liquid and Gaseous Sweet or Sour hydrocarbons,

THERMAL ISSUED PIPELINE SERVICE

See Appendix III for Piping Letter / Number Key

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

Inspection: (Note 16)

Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat II Sour

Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat I Sour/ ASTM A106-B

100% Visual inspection, 100% RT of circumference on 100% of

Material requirements: (Note 1)

SE/BW/SW ASTM A106-B

ASTM A234 WPB

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

3.2 mm, 316 SS, spiral wound

ASTM A193, Gr. B7M studs

ASTM A105 Body floating ball

ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A105 Body, piston

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

Inspection: (Note 16)

100% Visual inspection, 100% RT of circumference on 100% of

Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat II Sour

Z245.1 Gr. 359 Cat I Sour/A106-B

ASTM A234 WPB

Material requirements: (Note 1)

SE/SW/BW ASTM A106-B

Introduction and Line Classes - Pipelines

3.2 mm, 316 SS, spiral wound

ASTM A193, Gr. B7M studs

ASTM A105 Body

ASTM A105 Body